FireFinder. (NCCXP/W7-G/-GL and NCCXP/W7WAN Version 7.81) and Maintenanc. Siemens Industry, Inc. Building Technologies Division Florham Park, NJ

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "FireFinder. (NCCXP/W7-G/-GL and NCCXP/W7WAN Version 7.81) and Maintenanc. Siemens Industry, Inc. Building Technologies Division Florham Park, NJ"

Transcription

1 FireFinder Net etwor ork Command Cent enter er Graphics (NCCXP/W7-G/-GL and NCCXP/W7WAN Version 7.81) Operat ation, Installat allation, and Maintenanc enance e Manual Siemens Industry, Inc. Building Technologies Division Florham Park, NJ P/N Siemens Canada, Ltd North Service Road East Oakville, Ontario L6H 0H6 Canada

2 Table Of Contents 1 General Description and Features Introduction NCCG Version 7.80 Enhancements NCCG System Capabilities About This Manual Description Features NCCWAN Enhancements Overview Product Perspective User Characteristics Installation System Requirements - Software System Requirements - Hardware Pointing Devices Printing Devices Hardware Connections NCC-2F XNET Interface/MNET Interface via Internal PC Card NCC-2F CONFIGURATION NCC-2F CONTROLS AND INDICATORS NCC-2F INSTALLATION NCC-2F ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Network (XNET/MNET) NRC XNET Connection Shields Earth Ground Ground Fault Detection (Does Not apply to NCC-GL on MNET) NCCWAN HNET Interface used to connect MXLs with a CMI-300 or WAIOs COM-1 INSTALLATION COM-1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Network (HNET) with NCC-2F Computer Connection with NCC-2F Touch Screen Installation Uninterruptible Power Supply (For Application In U.S.A.) Security Key Attachment No Security Key Detected Degrade Security Startup Security Key Feature Value i

3 Table of Contents (Continued) Printer Installation For Computers Using Windows TO INSTALL THE LOGGING PRINTER IN THE NCC Printer Emphasis To install a graphics output only printer (optional) NCCG Graphic Printer Setup Template Placement Operator Display Introduction System Status Line The Browser Window The Graphics Window The Event Window System Node Status Bar The Button Array Control Point Window NCC Multi Monitor Support (Smoke Control Only) Configuration Basic Configuration - System Off-Line System Configuration Title Tab Options Tab More Tab Display Tab Color Tab Vectoring Tab Printers Tab Using the Graphics Printer Graphics Print Format Set Time Tab Logon Tab Basic Configuration - Network NCC-GL and MXL(IQ)/XLS Address Setup NCCG Node Edit Window MXL/XLS Node Edit Window WAIO Node Edit Window WAN Components Network Map Adding WAN Components Editing WAN Network Map Components Connection of COM-1 WAN Components Supervision of COM-1 WAN Components WAIO Network Settings Fiber Optic Network Configuration - Fiber Optic Switch Add A Fiber Optic Switch Edit A Fiber Optic Switch Delete A Fiber Optic Switch ii

4 Table of Contents (Continued) Basic Configuration - Smoke Control Basic Configuration - Device Edit INPUT GRAPHICS To Assign an Icon To Assign a Background Graphic Placing an Icon on a Background Graphic OPTIONS Control and Event Customization - Macros User-Defined Macro Commands Adding A Macro Modifying a Macro Deleting a Macro Printing a List of Macros Exiting the Macro Manager Control and Event Customization - Holidays Printing a List of Holidays Saving Definitions and Exiting the Holiday Manager Control and Event Customization - Events Adding an Event Daily Daily Solar One Time Only Modifying an Event Deleting an Event Printing a List of Events and Definitions Saving Events and Definitions Graphic Image Maintenance - Images Importing Base Browse and Unprogrammed Event Images Graphic Display Area Background Color Creating and Editing Images Creating An Image Adding and Editing Images Importing Images Graphic Image Maintenance Rebuilding The Database Image and Device Relationship Report Saving Selections and Exiting the Images Window Exiting the Images Window without Saving Selections Icon Editor System Sounds System Data Base Backup and Restore - Save Saving The NCC Data Base To A CD Saving The NCC Data Base To A Floppy Disk (Diskette) Saving The NCC Data Base To An External USB System Data Base Backup and Restore - Load System Data Base Backup and Restore - CSG/Zeus Import Exiting without Saving Changing a Device State iii

5 Table of Contents (Continued) 5 Operation Logging On Logging Off Acknowledging Events and Audibles ACK SILENCE RESET Event Display and Acknowledgement UL864 9th Edition Viewing Events in the Graphics Window ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT NEXT PREV Displaying Event Information - System ALARMS SUPERVISORY SECURITY TROUBLES STATUS DISABLED ANALOG THRESHOLD SENSITIVITY MODULE TYPES DEVICE TYPE MESSAGES NODE STATUS DONE Displaying Event Information - By Node Local/Global Operation General Description General Limitations MXL, XL3 and XLS Grouping Setup MXL/XLS Network Status Bar Manipulating MXL, XL3 and XLS Groups Monitor Mode Control Mode Full System Control Summary Screen Showing Where Control Lies WAIO System Node Button Request/Grant/Deny Transfer of Control Countdown Timer for Automatic Transfer of Control Loss of Control Handling and Notification NCC WAN Database Synchronization Logging Printer Output For Control or Monitor Mode Report and Graphics Printer Output For Control or Monitor Mode Event and Command History (Global with Filter by Group) History Data Conversion to Comma Delimited Text File Color Pallet iv

6 Table of Contents (Continued) Fly Over Comment Display Node Name Manual Operation Entering Core System Commands Core Commands ACKnowledge Command DEEnergize Command DEVice Command DISable Command ENAble Command ENErgize Command MODule Command NODe Command PASsword Command RESet Command SHOw Command SILence Command Fixed System Macro Commands User Defined Macro Commands USER Button Function Key Assignments History and Reports History - Creating A Report History XML file sample History - Creating An Archive Retrieving an Archived History File Graphic Editor Introduction Creating a New File Opening a File Selecting Colors Setting Pen Width Selecting Frame and/or Fill Selecting a Font Drawing Tools Saving a File Web Interface Introduction Starting The Web Interface Events Display NCC Events List Node Buttons Node Status v

7 Table of Contents (Continued) 10 Advanced Networking Introduction Appendix A... A-1 UL Listed Industrial Equipment Ordering Information... A-1 Appendix B... B-1 Latitude And Longitude Of Selected Cities... B-1 Appendix C... C-1 Manual: Core System Commands... C-1 Appendix D... D-1 OS/2 To NT Conversion... D-1 Appendix E... E-1 Event Reporting: Special Cases - Pseudo Modules... E-1 Appendix F... F-1 Command Script Definition Guidelines... F-1 Appendix G... G-1 Supported Vector File Formats...G-1 Appendix H... H-1 NCC-2F Driver Installation... H-1 Appendix I... I-1 Troubleshooting... I-1 Appendix J... J-1 Open Source In The NCC...J-1 Appendix K... K-1 Smoke Control: Basic Configuration... K-1 Appendix L.....L-1 Instructions for NCC Migration to GMS... L-1 vi

8 List Of Figures 1-1 NCC-GL Block Diagram NCC-G Block Diagram NCC-WAN Block Diagram NCC-WAN HUB-4 Mixed Application Block Diagram NCC-2F Module Board NCC-2F XNET Connections NRC To NCC Card Cage Connections NRC XNET To NCC-2F Connections NCC System Settings Screen - Use NRC For XNET NCC-2F MNST Connections Wiring for Ground Fault Detection (NCC-G Only) CAB3 Enclosure Row And Module Positions NCC-2F HNET Connections NCC-2F HNET Connections for Multiple CABs SCD-XP/XPWAN-B/BT With NCC-2F And SCD/19LT-2 Connection Diagram - Suitable For Rack Mount or Console Installations SCD-XP/XPWAN-B/BT With NCC-2F And SCD/19LT-2 Connection Diagram - Suitable For Desk Mount Installations NCC Multiple Monitor Connection Diagram - Suitable For Desk Mount Installation NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Security Key Error Default Screens Security Key Values Changed Screen Windows XP Add Printer Welcome Screen Windows Local or Network Printer Windows Printer Port Selection Windows Printer Software Selection Windows Printer Sharing Windows Printer Test Page Printers Setup Screen: Event Logging Printer Emphasis Settings Selector Printer Emphasis Presets Printers Setup Screen: Graphics Printer NCC-G/GL Template Placement NCC Graphics Main Screen NCC-GL Main Screen vii

9 List Of Figures (continued) 3-3 Browser Image View - Single Device Browser Image View - All Devices Device View With Thumbnail Images Device View With Image Selected Event Window Format Event Window Format - Display Node Name Option Event Icon Descriptions System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box HUB-4 Connected Node The Button Array Control Point Window For A Device Control Point Window - XLS Device With Components Input Components Control Window Output Components Control Window Multi Monitor Floor Plan Example Device Address With Custom Message More Commands Window Setup Window NCC System Settings Window - Title Tab NCC System Settings Window - Options Tab with Password Tab NCC System Settings Window - Options Tab with Logon Tab Touch Screen Keyboard NCC System Settings Window - More Tab NCC System Settings Window - Display Tab NCC System Settings Window - Color Tab NCC System Settings Window - Printers Tab Vector Tab With All Events and Nodes Enabled Vector Status Bar Vector Add Nodes/Groups Vector All Selected Sample Graphic Printout (Shown in Portrait Mode) NCC System Settings Window - Set Time Tab NCC System Settings Window - Logon Tab Edit a User Logon Window NCC System Settings Window - Passwords Tab viii

10 List Of Figures (continued) 4-20 Security Levels Windows - Upper View Security Levels Windows - Lower View Network Component Setup Window Network Component Setup Window - Scrolled Editing Node Window NCC-GL and MXL(IQ)/XLS Address Setup NCCG Node Edit Window NCCG Node Edit Window with TCP/IP Option MXL Node Edit Window MXL Network Connect MXL Node Edit Window COM-1 Connect XL3 Node Edit Window COM-1 Connect XLS Node Edit Window Adding A Node Window Settings for MXL with CMI MXL with local FSI XLSL Global FSI Configure Network Hardware Edit Comm Port WAN Components Network Map Add WAN Component Window Editing The HUB-4 In The WAN Network Map Editing The PSC-12 In The WAN Network Map Editing The NIC-C In The WAN Network Map WAIO Settings Window WAIO Editing Window Network Component Setup - Scalance X204-2 Fiber Optic Switches Fiber Optic Switch List Add A Fiber Optic Switch Edit A Fiber Optic Switch Delete A Fiber Optic Switch Device Edit Window - Input Tab Select a Device to Edit Window (With Component) a Select a Device to Edit with Device Selection Tree Enabled (With Component) Select a Device to Edit Window (With Sub-Module) Device Edit Window - Graphics Tab Device Icon Select Window ix

11 List Of Figures (continued) 4-55 Device Graphic Zoom Level Setup Open Window Device Icon Placement Editor - Bitmap Drawing Device Icon Placement Editor - CAD Drawing Device Icon Placement Editor - CAD Drawing With Zoom Device Edit - Options Tab Macro Manager Window New Macro Name Window Macro Definition Editor Holiday Manager Window Event Manager Window New Event Name Window Event Definition Editor - Script Tab Event Definition Editor - Settings Tab Images Window - Base Tab Graphic Selector Window Select a Graphic Window Change Background Color Selector Images Window - Images Tab NCCG Graphic Editor Copy File Window Select Source File Window Map Network Drive Window Select Destination Window Import XL-G Graphic Data Base Window XL-G File Selection Window Image Data Base Rebuild Window Please Wait! Window Completed! Window Setup Window - Images Button Images Window - Report Button Report Type And Report Detail Selection Image And Device Relationship Report Selecting The Icons Button Icon Edit Initial Screen Create a New Icon Window x

12 List Of Figures (continued) 4-91 Creating a New Icon Copy File Dialog Box Using the Copy File Edit Icon or Description Window Icon Editor Edit Icon Or Description Window Checking the Icon Edit Screen Master Sound Level Control System SoundsTab Individual Sound Edit Window Save System Files To CD/DVD CD/DVD Writer: Getting Media Information Browse For Folder: Media Not Blank Viewing Back-up To CD/DVD Progress CD/DVD Writer: Initializing CD/DVD Writer: Recording Save System To Drive Complete Save System Files Drive A a Prepare Media - Erase Only b Prepare Media - Format Browse For Folder: Diskette Not Blank Viewing Backup To Diskette Progress Insert Next Diskette Media Change Notification Save System Files To An External USB Prepare Media Window - USB Device Prepare Media Window - USB Device Prepare Media Window Displaying New Folder - USB Device Save System To USB - Complete Load System From Drive Load System From Drive - Insert CD Load Complete NCC Backup Manager Register Backup Files - Start Register Backup Files - In Process Register Backup Files - Complete xi

13 List Of Figures (continued) NCC Backup Manager - Complete Import a CSG-M/Zeus Configuration Window Change A Device State Window (WIth Component) a Change A Device State with Device Selection Tree Enabled b Change A Device State Output with Selection Tree Enabled Change A Device State Window (With Sub-Module) Enter Password Window - Password Only Enter Password Window - Logon and Password Product Information Window Button Array Show or Print System Information Window List of Devices in Alarm for Node Window List of Supervisory States For Node Window List of Security States For Node Window List of Troubles For Node Window List of Status States For Node Window List of Disabled Devices for Node Window Show Analog Voltages for Module Window List of Analog Voltages for Devices in a Given Module Window Show Device Threshold for Module Window List of Threshold Readings for Devices in a Given Module Window Show Device Sensitivities for Module Window List of Sensitivity Readings for Devices in a Given Module Window Show Module Types for Node Window List of Modules in a Given Node Window List of Module Types and Firmware Revisions for an NCC Show Device Types for Module Window List of Device Types in a Given Module Window Show Device Messages for Module Window List of Device Messages in a Given Module Window List of Node Status Information Window System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (MXL) System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (MXL on CMI) System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (XLS) System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (XL3 on HUB-4) xii

14 List Of Figures (continued) 5-30 Connect Node Window Reset Operation Query Window Show or Print Node Information Window Network Component Setup With Group Button Group Setting Window Add A Group Window Edit A Group Node Map Group Dialog Box Node Status Toolbar Node Dialog Box NCC WAN Group Status Line With Last Group In Monitor Mode NCC WAN Group Status Line With Last Group In Control Mode System Node Status Bar - With WAIO WAIO Dialog Box Matrix Showing Configured WAIO Nodes WAIO Module Dialog Box Command Request Dialog Box Attention - Command Requested Dialog Box Printers Setup Screen Display Node Names Manual Command Entry Window User Defined Commands Window History Window History: Setup Report Window - Files Tab History Destination Select Window History: Setup Report Window - Date Range Tab Start Date Selection Window History: Setup Report Window - Devices Tab Select Device Window History: Setup Report Window - Filters Tab Archive History Window Graphic Editor New Image Parameters Window xiii

15 List Of Figures (continued) 8-3 Base Image Window Set Pen Color Window Set Fill Color Window Set Pen Width Window Set Edit Text Window Save Window Web Interface NCC Logon Web Interface NCC Logon Error Events Window Node Status Window Group Window Advanced Networking Option Advanced Networking Setup Location of Channels Button System Channels Router Groups Edit a Channel Channel Membership Add Panel Add NCC Edit NCC Add VNT Edit VNT Network Tree View Location XNET Tree View WAN Tree View Routes Tree View xiv

16 List Of Tables NCCG Family Of Products UL Listed Industrial Computer Specifications CAB Enclosure Components NCC Graphics Package Part Numbers UL Listed System Type And Template Selection System Status Messages Module Commands Fixed Macro Commands Function Key Assignments External History Report File Format External History Report File Format - XML UL Listed Industrial Equipment Ordering Information... A-1 Manual: Core System Commands... C-1 NCC Module 1 Pseudo Devices... E-2 Command Script Syntax for Address Range... F-2 Troubleshooting: NCC... I-1 Troubleshooting: Smoke Control... I-1 Zeus Error Messages... K-7 NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES This product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below. P rogram feature or option Permitted in UL 864? (Y/N) Possible settings Settings permitted in UL 864 Foreign country support No Checked Not checked Not checked NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES This product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems, ULC-S527-99, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below. Program feature or option Permitted in ULC-S527-99? (Y/N) Possible settings Settings permitted in ULC-S WAIO No XLS MXL XL3 VNT WAIO XLS MXL XL3 xvi

17 CHAPTER 1 General Description and Features 1 General Description and Features Introduction The Network Command Center Graphics product family is now comprised of two system series: The NCC-G Series, which includes the NCC-GL, NCC-1G, NCC-2G, NCC-3G and NCC-4G software packages. The NCCWAN Series, which includes the NCCWAN1G, NCCWAN2G, NCCWAN3G, NCCWAN4G, NCCWAN5G, NCCWAN6G, and NCCWAN7G software packages. These software packages, when operating in the appropriate UL 864 listed computer, form the FireFinder Network Command Center Graphics system (NCCG). For new installations, the NCC-G and NCCWAN software package includes the FireFinder CD-ROM program, a software key, keyboard templates and this manual. For conversions the NCC-G software package includes the FireFinder CD-ROM program (the keyboard templates are compatible with the NCC-G package.) NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS (NCCG) NCC-G Series Family Of Products NCCWAN Series (Standard Systems) # Of Nodes I nterface (WAN Systems) # Of Nodes Interface NCC-GL 1 XNET/MNE T NCC-1G 1-16 XNET NCC-2G 1-32 XNET NCC-3G 1-48 XNET NCC-4G 1-64 XNET NCCWAN1 G 1-16 XNET/HNE T NCCWAN2 G 1-32 XNET/HNE T NCCWAN3 G 1-48 XNET/HNE T NCCWAN4 G 1-64 XNET/HNE T N CCWAN5G 1-128* XNET/HNE T N CCWAN6G 1-256* XNET/HNE T N CCWAN7G 1-520* XNET/HNE T * Nodes above 64 cannot be on XNET 1-1

18 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual NCC-G Version 7.80 Enhancements NCC-G Version 7.80 adds Foreign System Interface (FSI) support for FireFinder- XLS and MXL on HNET WAN. Also in this version, the NCC can communicate to the VNT through an Ethernet connection. The VNT is used to tunnel the XNET and HNET protocols from the Panels to the NCC. Please note that this release can be configured as a server for smoke control or as a standard NCC. It has the following enhancements and additions: Supervises the Siemens Scalance X204-2 Fiber Optic Switch for both Style 4 and Style 7 topologies and for power supervision Supports multiple screens Enhances the support of AutoCAD drawing Includes support of VNT nodes Acts as a server for the Smoke Control Client application Uses a relational database for Smoke Control data Enables NCC communication to MXL and XLS panels through FSI-WAN NCC-G Version 7.81 Enhancements It has the following enhancements and additions: Advanced networking and new VNT Support Updated Zeus XML Support Scalance switch single mode fiber support Smoke control support IP authentication and encryption WAN subnet node support to 56 nodes Support for HUB-4 RS485 Style 7 over fiber using D2300/D2325 fiber modules NCC-G System Capabilities All NCC-G Systems use UL 864 listed computers, SIEMENS Models (Refer to appendix for PCs) (purchased separately). The Graphical User Interface (GUI) of both the NCC-G and NCCWAN allow an operator to do the following: View and acknowledge global system off-normal events View graphic displays View global system lists and data Control a single or a networked MXL/XLS system through the keyboard or a pointing device The SCD-DUAL-CORE Model computer is used with the NCC in a multi-touch LCD smoke control application. The NCC-G and NCCWAN are built around the Win32 interface which allows their use on Windows XP TM Service Pack 2, Windows 7 Service Pack 1 or higher. The operator can also perform the following functions from the NCC-G, using either a keyboard, touch screen or mouse: 1-2

19 CHAPTER 1 General Description and Features Changing detector sensitivities Controlling outputs Generating history reports Browsing system layouts Acknowledging single events Silencing/unsilencing audible devices Resetting the system Viewing system lists Backup or archive history Setting system features Managing system passwords Changing system messages Define system macros Appending comment messages to events Arming and disarming devices Backup/Restore NCC database About This Manual In general, the NCC-G System leads the operator through the program with popup menus and dialog boxes. However, all of the functions available through NCCG can be accessed using a variety of methods: Touch screen (including on-screen touch keyboard) Mouse Function keys Standard keyboard To help you locate and interpret information easily, this guide uses consistent visual cues and a standard key combination format. These conventions are explained as follows: Indicates information for MOUSE and/or TOUCH SCREEN Indicates information for FUNCTION KEYS Indicates information for STANDARD KEYBOARD NOTE: As you begin to read this guide and use the NCC-G software, you may occasionally notice one or more buttons that are grayed out or lighter in color than the rest of the information on the screen. This represents either a feature(s) that is currently disabled and will be available in a future release of the NCC-G software, or it is not available at your current password level. 1-3

20 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Description The NCCG computer system may be rack mounted or desktop mounted. When it is rack mounted, the equipment consists of the following: A rack mount main unit containing the industrial computer, hard disk, etc. A rack mount color monitor with optional touch screen (and/or mouse) A rack/desktop mounted keyboard The NCC-G connects to an XNET only using an NCC-2F internal PC card, as shown in Figures 1-1 and 1-2. The NCCWAN connects to systems using one or two NCC-2F internal PC cards, dependent on the configuration, as shown in Figure 1-3. One NCC-2F is used to connect to a COM-1 cabinet (HNET) and the WAN component boards, HUB-4, NIC-C, and PSC-12. Each HUB-4 can connect to up to four MXL, XL3 or XLS panels. If there are additional nodes or another NCC on an MXL/XLS network (XNET), another NCC-2F is required. If there is only one additional NCC, it may be connected using Ethernet. A HUB-4 can also connect up to 64 Wide Area Input Output (WAIO) boards which can be used for remote system monitoring. Refer to Figure 1-3. Features Intuitive Graphical User Interface (GUI) Global and local commands SVGA Graphics support (any format) Event display by color and icon indication Multiple Displays Simultaneous terminal and graphics mode Time-based command generation Display of all networked MXL/XLS state changes User-definable macros User-definable device names Multiple access levels Disk-based history logging Context sensitive Help Touch screen, mouse and keyboard control Touch keyboard support Multiple printer support On-line graphics editing Menu driven system controls Large navigation control buttons Holiday functions Graphic import and editing on-line Independent input and output messages On-line ICON editor 1-4

21 CHAPTER 1 General Description and Features NCC-GL OR NCC-GL MNET NCC-2F RS-485 connection via NCC-2F (internal PC card) MNET RS-485 connection via NCC-2F (internal PC card) XNET NCC-2F XNET MXL MXLR MXLR NIC-C XLS Figure 1-1 NCC-GL Block Diagram NCC-G RS-485 connection via NCC-2F (internal PC card) XNET NCC-2F RS-485 connection via NCC-2F (internal PC card) MXL MNET NIM-1W NIM-1W MNET MXL XNET XNET XLS XNET NIC-C NIM-1W MNET MXL To other MXLs or XLSs Figure 1-2 NCC-G Block Diagram 1-5

22 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Image and device relationship report Disarm/arm device function Graphic print out based on event type Multiple filters for concise history report generation CXL-G and MXL-G graphic database importation Sound element assignment for system state and/or event type History data in XML or CSV ASCII format for use in external databases Graphics browser window Zeus XML database file importation NCCWAN component support to allow connection of modem or RS485 connected (CMI-300, RPM-FSI, HUB-Slave-FSI, NIM-1W/1M-FSI, MMX-1) panels. CD writer support for history archive and database backup. Control (Ack, Silence/Unsilence, Reset) MXL, XLS on the same XNET. Wide Area Input Output (WAIO) support Autocad support USB memory devices support NCCWAN component support to allow connection of XLS and MXL panels WEB Based event display (no control) NCCWAN Enhancements Overview The NCCWAN system acts as the supervisor and controller of all of the boards in a COM-1 cabinet, which currently include the PSC-12, PSX-12, NIC-C and HUB-4. The NCCWAN can be programmed to allow communication with either the XLS, MXL or XL3 Fire Alarm Panels. The information received by the NCC (NCCWAN) from the remote panels will be annunciated on the monitor and printed on the logging printer. NCCWAN can also communicate with XLS/MXL panels using FSI. The NCC will also be able to communicate with up to three other XNETed NCC computers located throughout the facility when MXLs and/or XLSs are resident on the XNET. If the NCC is controlling a pure NCCWAN system (no MXL/XLS on XNET), then it can communicate with an additional five NCCs if connected by XNET, or 10 NCCs if connected by Ethernet. The XLS, MXL or XL3 will connect in a star type configuration (HUB-4s) similar to that of the CXL Systems. MXLs will also connect to the NCCs XNET in lieu of or in addition to the star configuration. NCCs can be configured to operate over the long distance communication package (NIM-1W/1M-XNET) in a Style 4 configuration. The software enhancements used to provide the NCCWAN features are enabled by selecting the proper options and purchasing the necessary hardware key. 1-6

23 CHAPTER 1 General Description and Features Product Perspective The NCC computer connects to the NIC-C located in a COM-1 cabinet via the RS-485 HNET communication channel. The NIC-C is the long distance communicating device for all other HNET modules located in the COM-1 cabinet. The HUB-4, like the NIC-C, mounts in the CC-5 Card Cage and acts as a four port modem/rs-485 interface to the MMX, CMI-300, NIM-1W, NIM-1W/-1M, RPM or WAIOs. The HUB-4 will support XLSs/MXLs/XL3s or WAIOs (refer to Figure 1-4) or any combination of four panels; however, each COM-2 board on the HUB-4 must have the same RS-485 or Modem application. The HUB-4 draws its power from the PSC-12 Power Supply but unlike the other CC-5 modules needs to have the 24 volts run externally to the bottom row connectors of the card cage. The external power connection is required due to the 400mA current requirements of the fully loaded HUB-4. The HUB-4 functions as a gateway between the NCC and the remotely connected XLS/MXL/XL3 control panel transmitting information between the two. Further, the HUB-4 provides all necessary supervision to the XLS/MXL/XL3 and is charged with notifying the NCC of any failure of supervision for annunciation at the head end. (Note: Inter-panel logic is not available when connected via the HUB-4s.) The HUB-4 can also act as a four port 485 interface to connect up to 64 Wide Area Input Output (WAIO) cards, with a maximum of 16 per port. This application still uses the 24 volts run externally to the bottom row connectors of the CC-5 card cage. The HUB-4 performs the supervision of the WAIOs and notifies the NCC of any failure of supervision for annunciation at the head end. The HUB-4 also acts as the gateway for all WAIO input monitoring and ouput control by exchanging information between the WAIO and the NCC. The NCCWAN broadcasts events to and routes commands from other NCCs primarily over proprietary XNET. The NCCWAN also provides for a backup NCC to take over monitoring and control of a COM-1(s) in the event of a failure in the primary NCC. User Characteristics The power and flexibility of the NCCWAN System provides multiple methods of interface to other NCCs for annunciation of the remote MXLs, XL3s and XLSs. This may include the use of two of the following three networking wiring methods. 1. HNET is required to allow communication between the NCC and the HUB-4s (via NIC-C). The HNET can be wired in a Style 4 or Style 7 configuration using either dedicated copper wire (per published constraints) or fiber modules. Multiple COM-1 cabinets can be connected together. A secondary or backup NCC can be provided to connect to the COM-1 cabinets in addition to the primary NCC. 2. XNET can be used to provide long distance communication (employing the Modem Bridge) as well as intermixing COM-1s and MXLs and XLSs connected via XNET to the system. The use of XNET also allows the Local/ Global operational feature to be added to the WAN Package. (Up to 4 NCCs can be connected on XNET.) 1-7

24 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual NCCWAN RS-485 CONNECTION VIA NCC-2F (INTERNAL PC CARD) XNET NCC-2F HNET NCC-2F RS-485 CONNECTION VIA NCC-2F (INTERNAL PC CARD) HNET MNET MXL NIM-1W NIC-C HUB-4 XNET HNET (INTERNAL) HUB-4 MNET MXL NIM-1W PSC-12 HUB-4 NCC WAN TO OTHER MXLs AND NCCWANs HUB-4 TO OTHER NIC-Cs COM-1 CABINET MMX NIM-1W/-1M and Modem Block Module MNET CMI-300 MNET CMI-300 HNET Modem or RS baud depending on application TO OTHERCMI-300s/ NIM-1W, NIM-1M and Modem Block Modules/ MMXs HUB-4 RS485 HUB-4 Modem TO OTHER HUB-4 RS485 TO OTHER HUB-4 RS485 TO OTHER MXLs/LXSs/ WAIOs WAIO FACP WAIO FACP 485 INTERFACE COMMUNICATIONS XL3 MXL MXL XLS XLS XLS MAX. 16 WAIO FACP Figure 1-3 NCCWAN Block Diagram 1-8

25 CHAPTER 1 General Description and Features NCC-G NCC-2F HNET HUB-4 COM2 COM2 RS-485 RS-485 MODEM MODEM FSI-WAN HNET WAN FSI-WAN / HNET WAN FSI-WAN NIM-1W / WAIO NIM-1W / NIM-1M RPM/ HUB-4 Slave FOREIGN SYSTEM/ WAIO MXL CMI-300 / MMX XLS MXL Figure 1-4 NCC-G HUB-4 Mixed Application Block Diagram 1-9

26 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 3. ETHERNET (dedicated LAN) can also be used with the WAN Package basically taking the place of the XNET for NCC to NCC communications. Care must be taken prior to deciding to use Ethernet communication and it is strongly recommended that you contact Siemens Fire Safety Applications prior to proceeding (this may effect UL Listing). At least one NCC must be connected via XNET, HNET or both to use this feature. When configuring the NCCWAN System, it is important to note that one or more networks may be involved. Should the installation require only one NCC computer connected to the COM-1 panel to supervise the internal modules, then only HNET is required. However, if two or more NCC computers are required, you must make provisions for a second network "XNET" (ETHERNET can be used also). 1-10

27 Chapter 2 Installation 2 Installation System Requirements - Software The Network Command Center Graphics product family operates with the following software: Connection over XNET - MXL operating software 7.00 or higher with CSG-M 7.01 or higher and FireFinder-XLS Rev or higher with Zeus or higher is required. Connection using a HUB-4 - MXL operating software 5.06 or higher and CMI-300 Rev 5 or higher is required. Display of supervisory and security reports at NCCWAN - MXL operating software revision (6.14 MXL-IQ) and CSG-M or higher is required. Connection using a HUB-4 FSI - MXL operating software (if security feature used), (no security) XLS operating software xxxx The NCC-G programs require Windows XP Professional, Service Pack 2, Windows 7, Service Pack 1 or higher operating system. Windows comes preinstalled in computer models (refer to appendix for PCs). Each MXL/XLS in the system must be loaded with a valid configuration. The MXL configuration must be edited and compiled using CSG-M Version 7.01 or higher. The XLS configuration must be edited and compiled using Zeus Version or higher. The NCC-G must be included in the node map of each MXL/XLS connected to it. Refer to the Appendix Manual for CSG-M Revision 7.01, P/N , for further information. System Requirements - Hardware Computer systems with fewer capabilities may work at the expense of system performance. Siemens Industry, Inc. cannot guarantee that any NCCG system will work with computers other than the models listed on the following page, as tests are performed only with the UL recognized models offered. 2-1

28 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual UL Listed Industrial Computer Specifications MODEL* CPU Refer to appendix for PCs Pentium Ghz O perating System Windows XP Professional, SP2, Windows 7, SP1 or higher RAM Hard Disk DVD-ROM Floppy Graphics Card 1 GB 80 GB CD-R/ W 1.44MB On Board CPU Card Monitors** SCD-17L-2 or SCD-19L-2 Touch Screen Option SCD-17LT-2 or SCD-19LT- 2 Serial Ports 2 RS232, COM1, COM2 Parallel Ports LPT1, LPT2 ( Monochrome) Printer PAL-1 *The industrial computer is UL 864 and UL 1076 listed. UL Listed Industrial Computer Specifications MODEL* CPU Operating System RAM Hard Disk DVD-ROM Floppy SCD-DUAL-COR E Intel Core 2 Duo - 2.0Ghz Windows XP Professional, SP3 or higher 2 GB 160 GB CD-R/ W 1.44MB Graphics Card 3 x nvidia 6200 Monitors SCD-17L-2 or SCD-19L-2 Touch Screen Option SCD-17LT-2, SCD-19LT-2 or SMOKE- CTRL-42-TLCD Serial Ports 2 RS232, COM1, COM2 Parallel Ports LPT1, LPT2 USB Ports 4 USB 2. 0 ( Monochrome) Printer PAL-1 *The industrial computer is UL 864 and UL 1076 listed. UL Listed Industrial Computer Specifications MODEL* CPU Operating System Hard Disk NCCWAN i7 - UHW-W7I7WAN-00T-M, UHW-W7I7WAN-00L-M Intel Sandy Bridge QM67Intel Dual Xeon 5500/6600 Up to Quad-Core Technology Intel i7, 2nd Generation Windows 7 Professional 64 bit, SP1 or higher RAM 8 GB DDR3 DVD-ROM USB Graphics Card 250 GB SSD, 2 TB SATA DVD-R/ W 2 Behind Lock Door On Board CPU Card, Multi-monitor Capable Monitors** SCD-19-L-2, UHW L-L or UHW L-L Touch Screen Option SCD-19-LT-2, UHW T-L or UHW T-L Serial Ports 6 RS232, COM1-6 Parallel Ports LPT1 ( Monochrome) Printer PAL-1 *The industrial computer is UL 864 and UL 1076 listed. See Appendix A for UL Listed Industrial Ordering Information. 2-2

29 Chapter 2 Installation NOTE: Always remove power (Battery and AC) and wait at least 10 seconds to allow the supply voltages to decay before installing or removing any module, cable or wiring. Pointing Devices In addition to all of the requirements listed above, a typical system includes one of the following pointing devices: a mouse (included in the SCD-XP/XPWAN-B/BT computer models) touch screen (refer to appendix for PCs). The mouse and the touch screen may be used simultaneously. Printing Devices The PAL-1 24-pin wide carriage logging printer (P/N ) is mandatory for UL listed systems. The following optional Windows supported printers may be used in addition to the PAL-1: 9- or 24-pin EPSON compatible (standard carriage) Centronics interface Hewlett Packard LaserJet 2/3 (laser graphics printing on LPT2) Hardware Connections NCC-2F The NCC-2F comes pre-installed in new computer models (refer to appendix for PCs) and running Windows. Refer to Figure 2-1. Electrical Ratings NCC-2F: 5 250mA Network (XNET/MNET/HNET): 8V P-P, 75mA max XNET Interface/MNET Interface via Internal PC Card The NCC-2F provides the computer with a direct RS-485 connection to the XLS's XNET and the MXL s XNET or MNET (NCC-GL). A direct connection can only be made if the XLS modes use NIC-C network cards and the MXL modes use NIM network cards.this eliminates the requirement that the computer be located within 25 feet of a NIM-1R. The NCC-2F operates in both Style 4 and Style 7 modes. The module installs in the computer and requires an empty PCI slot. The NCC-2F can be set to any standard PC COM port address and interrupt. UL listed computers model (refer to appendix for PCs) (purchased from SIEMENS) will be shipped with the NCC-2F card installed and configured for XNET as COM3. 2-3

30 1 5 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual NCC-2F CONFIGURATION The NCC-2F is assigned to a standard COM port by Windows when the drivers are installed. The installation process usually takes the next available COM port. There are no jumpers involved. The NCC-G can use any COM port for XNET and HNET, but it needs to be told at startup if it is not using the standard assigned COM ports. The NCC will automatically adjust for COM port changes once the NCC-2F cards are assigned to XNET or HNET. Note: There are no jumpers to configure on the NCC-2F. NCC-2F CONTROLS AND INDICATORS The NCC-2F provides one reset switch and 4 LEDs that are accessible through the back of the PC it is mounted in. The reset switch is located just below TB1. Pushing the reset switch initializes the NCC-2F operation. Refer to Figure 2-1. The LEDs are located above TB1 and are, in top to bottom order: NET OK (Green) Blinks to indicate network is receiving data. HOST OK (Green) Blinks to indicate data to transmit. CH A (Yellow) Blinks* to indicate individual Channel A select. CH B (Yellow) Blinks* to indicate individual Channel B select. *If LED is steady, indicates a Style 7 fault on that channel. NET OK HOST OK CH A CH B DS2 DS1 DS4 DS5 P2 U NCC-2F S1 RESET TB1 S2 P1 SIDE VIEW NOTES: AWG minimum ohms max. per pair. 3. Use twisted pair or twisted shielded pair. 4. Terminate the shield at one and only one place in the system. 5. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC Maximum voltage 8V P-P. 7. Maximum current 75mA. 8. Each pair independently supervised. Figure 2-1 NCC-2F Module Board 2-4

31 Chapter 2 Installation NCC-2F INSTALLATION Remove all NCCG power before installation. PAIR A SUPERVISED POWER LIMITED PAIR B (OMIT FOR STYLE 4) SUPERVISED POWER LIMITED TO ADDITIONAL NIM-1Rs, NIM-1Ws, NCC-2Fs OR NIC-Cs DO NOT USE DO NOT USE SEE NOTE 8 NIC-C DO NOT USE (MUST BE IN SAME ENCLOSURE AS THE PMI/PMI-2) ONE SLOT OF CC DO NOT USE NCC-2F LOCATED INSIDE NCC/ DESIGO CC/VNT NOTE: IF THE NCC/DESIGO CC/VNT IS LOCATED AT THE END OF THE XNET NETWORK, INSTALL EOLR P/N ACROSS TERMINALS 1&2AND3&4. NOTES: 1. No EOLR required for NIC-C. 2. The screw terminals can accommodate one 12-24AWG or two 16-24AWG. 3. From the NCC-2F to NIM-1R, NIM-1W or NCC-2F: 80 Ohms max. per pair. Unshielded twisted pair -.5μF line to line Shielded twisted pair -.3μF line to line,.4μf line to shield NIM-1R / NIM-1W Figure 2-2 NCC-2F XNET Connections MOM-4 TB3 OR TB4 4. From the NCC-2F to NIC-C: 2000 feet (33.8 ohms) max. per pair between CC-5s/ CC-2s.. Unshielded twisted pair.25μf max. line to line Shielded twisted pair.15μf max. line to line.2μf max. line to shield 5. Use twisted pair or twisted shielded pair. 6. Terminate shields at one end only. 7. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC CC-5 terminals 9-14 are not connected and can be used to tie shields together. 9. Positive or negative ground fault detected at <10K ohms on pins 3-4, 7-8 of the NIC-C. 10. Each pair independently supervised. 11. Maximum voltage 8V P-P. 12. Maximum current 75mA during message transmission. To install the NCC-2F in a computer in which it is not factory installed, follow the steps listed below: 1. Unscrew the two knurled knobs on the rear of the NCC-G computer. 2. Slide the cover back an inch or so and lift it off. 3. The NCC-2F installs into any free PCI 5V compliant slot in the NCC-G computer. Select a slot and remove the blank cover, keeping the screw. 4. Remove the terminal block from the NCC-2F by removing the two screws that hold it to the bracket. 5. Place the NCC-2F into the open slot so that the NCC-2F card edge extends through the opening in the back of the PC. 6. Align the NCC-2F with the card edge connector in the NCC-G computer and press it firmly into place. 7. Secure the NCC-2F by installing the screw that held the blank cover. (Refer to Step 3.) 8. Replace the NCC-G computer cover and tighten the knurled knobs. 9. Reattach the terminal block by sliding it onto the NCC-2F card edge and install the two screws. This is a keyed connection and will only install one way. 10. After the NCC-2F card is installed in the NCC-G computer, install the NCC-2F drivers following the instructions in Appendix H. 2-5

32 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual NCC-2F ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Network (XNET/MNET) The XNET/MNET connections are made on terminals 1-4 of the terminal block on the rear of the NCC-2F. The primary pair (or network A) is on terminals 1 and 2. The secondary pair (or network B) is on terminals 3 and 4. For Style 4 networks, install a 120 ohm EOLR on terminals 3 and 4. Then connect the primary pair to terminals 1 and 2. For Style 7 networks, no EOLRs are needed; just connect to both the primary and secondary pairs. Note: See Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 for wiring details. NRC XNET Connection To connect an NCC to a XLS network system (rev. PMI07.00 or higher) which uses NRC network cards instead of NIC-C network cards, a bridge needs to be constructed. The bridge uses a NIC-C card and a NRC card to transfer information between the NCC and the XLS ring network. Its construction is described below: Add a separate CC-2 or CC-5 card cage to one node on the XLS network system. At the added CC-2 or CC-5 card cage, install and secure into connector P1 an Interface Isolation Card (IIC). Refer to the IIC Installation Instructions, P/N The IIC allows only the power wires from the ribbon cable attached to it to reach the new card cage. All other signals in the cable are stopped at the IIC. Connect a 60-pin ribbon cable (BCL) from the existing XLS network system node to teh male connector on the IIC. FROM PREVIOUS NRC TO NEXT NRC TO NCC STYLE 4/7 CC-2/CC-5 60 PIN CABLE FROM PREVIOUS XLS CARD CAGE NRC NIC-C IIC NIC ADDRESS NOT USED SET AT 003 INTERFACE ISOLATION CARD (ISOLATES CARD CAGE SO ONLY POWER IS USED FROM LOCAL NODE) Figure 2-3 NRC To NCC Card Cage Connections Insert another NRC and NIC-C into this isolated card cage. Do not enter these cards into the Zeus configuration for this node or for the network system. Only the NCC is added to the Zeus configuration as a network node. Note that this NRC is another, second NRC required for communicating with the NCC. 2-6

33 Chapter 2 Installation Wire the NRC so that it is inserted into the XLS network ring. Refer to Figure 2-3 and 2-4, and the NRC Installation Instructions, P/N Install a 120 ohm EOLR onto terminals 1 and 2 of the NCC's NCC-2F and another one to terminals 3 and 4. Connect the NCC-2F to the NIC-C as shown in Figure 2-4. Connect Pair A for Style 4 and Pairs A and B for Style 7. Set the NIC-C address to 003. PAIR B SUPERVISED POWER LIMITED 120 OHMS EOLR FROM NRC IN LOCAL XLS B1 A1 B2 A2 TO NEXT NRC PAIR A SUPERVISED POWER LIMITED NCC-2F NRC NIC-C ONE SLOT OF CC-5 ONE SLOT OF CC-5 Figure 2-4 NRC XNET To NCC-2F Connections Restriction for NCC on Style 4 Class B XNET network provided via NRC: NCC must be connected between two XLS network nodes. An NCC cannot be at either end of a Style 4 Class B network, otherwise supervision for Ground Faults and Open/Shorts is not guaranteed. There is no restriction for NCC(s) connected in a Style 7 Class X network; they can be anywhere in the ring network. There is an NCC system option setting that must be set to use the NRC. Refer to Figure 2-5. This screen appears by selecting MORE-SETUP-SYSTEM-OPTIONS and then clicking the "More" tab. Select the option "Use NRC for XNET." Figure 2-5 NCC System Settings Screen - Use NRC For XNET 2-7

34 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Shields Shields for the XNET/MNET must be connected at ONE and ONLY ONE end of the network. See Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-6. Earth Ground A good earth ground must be provided for proper transient protection of the NCC-2F and the computer. Connect a separate ground to terminal 5 on the NCC-2F. See Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-6. MNET END POINT STYLE 4 ONLY NOTES: AWG minimum ohms max. per pair. 3. Use twisted pair or twisted shielded pair. 4. Terminate the shield at one and only one place in the system. 5. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC Maximum voltage 8V P-P. 7. Maximum current 75mA. 8. Each pair independently supervised. TO MMB-1/-2/-3, SMB-1/-2, PSR-1, MOI-7, PS-5N7, NCC-1F OR NCC-2F * * * EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/2W, 5% P/N TB1 NCC-2F TO MMB-1/-2/-3, SMB-1/-2, PSR-1, MOI-7, PS-5N7, NCC-1F OR NCC-2F NETWORK B (SECONDARY) SUPERVISED OMIT THIS PAIR FOR STYLE 4 MNET MID POINT STYLE 4 OR STYLE 7 TO MMB-1/-2/-3, SMB-1/-2, PSR-1, MOI-7, PS-5N7, NCC-1F OR NCC-2F NETWORK A (PRIMARY) SUPERVISED TB1 NCC-2F MMB-1/-2/-3 TB1 SMB-1/-2 TB1 PSR-1 TB4 MOI-7 TB1 PS-5N7 TB1 Figure 2-6 NCC-2F MNET Connections Ground Fault Detection (Does Not apply to NCC-GL on MNET) The NCC-2F provides electrical isolation between the computer and the XNET. This allows for ground fault detection to be enabled on the XNET. Ground fault detection is only possible if the NCC is connected to XNET with an NCC-2F. Ground fault detection must be enabled at a NIM-1R/-1W or NIC-C. Select one and only one NIM-1R/-1W or NIC-C in the system where the ground fault is to be detected. You must locate the NIM-1R/-1W in a cabinet with either an MMB-1/-2/-3, SMB-1/-2, or a PSR-1. See Figure 2-7 for the wiring diagram. If the XNET is divided into multiple sections of copper wire using fiber optic segments, ground fault detection can be enabled at one NIM-1R/-1W or NIC-C for each section of copper wire. Refer to the NIC-C Installation Instructions, P/N if you wish to use the NIC-C to provide ground fault detection. 2-8

35 Chapter 2 Installation NCCWAN HNET Interface used to connect MXLs with a CMI-300 or WAIOs A second NCC-2F card, P/N , is required to support the WAN features. Two NCC-2Fs come pre-installed in computer models (refer to appendix for PCs). If you are using a computer other than these models, you must purchase one additional NCC-2F card. The second NCC-2F card is part of the NCCWAN kit and must be installed as COM5 (default) on the computer. The NCC-2F provides the computer with a direct RS-485 connection to the HNET through the NIC-C card. The NCC-2F operates in both Style 4 and Style 7 modes. 1. The module installs in the computer and requires an empty PCI slot. 2. The NCC-2F should be set to COM5 (default) but other COM port assignments can be used if entered during NCC-G setup. COM-1 INSTALLATION The SIEMENS COM-1 is the NCCWAN communication interface hardware that is installed in a CAB-1X, CAB-2, or CAB3 cabinet and which consists of the CC-5, PSC-12, PSX-12, NIC-C and HUB-4 modules. Follow Steps 1 through 20 for installation. Each step is thoroughly explained in the referenced installation instructions TB3 NIM-1R/-1W IN TB3 MOM-4 TB5 2 1 _ + USE ONLY ONE NIM-1R/-1W IN TB TB4 MOM-2 TB7 TB _ + Figure 2-7 Wiring for Ground Fault Detection (NCC-G Only) 2-9

36 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 1. Install the desired enclosure; CAB1-X, CAB2 or CAB3. Refer to the CAB Enclosure Components table below to select the appropriate installation instructions. Refer also to Figure 2-8 on the next page for information on CAB rows and module placement. 2. Install the TSW-2 Tamper Switch when required for UL 1076 applications. When the TSW-2 is used in COM-1 applications, it must be connected to a TRI series device that is part of an MXL system (See the TRI-S/D/R installation instructions, P/N ). The MXL system will report the tamper switch activation in the COM-1. The connector termination on the TSW-2 wires must be removed and the wires connected to the switch input of the TRI device. The TSW-2 switch is a normally closed contact when the COM-1 enclosure door is in the closed position. The TSW-2 is installed in the rectangular slot provided on either the right or left side of the backbox depending on which direction the door opens. The TSW-2 is located on the backbox side opposite the side the door is hinged to. The TRI must be mounted inside the COM-1 enclosure. The TRI device can be mounted to a pair of the center threaded posts on the CAB-MP. A male to female (#10-32 male thread) standoff can be used to provide clearance between the TRI device and the CAB-MP. Systems for UL 1076 applications require at least one vacant position on a CAB-MP for mounting of the TRI device. 3. Pull the field wiring into the backbox and dress it to approximately where it will go. 4. Install the CC-5 on a CAB-MP mounting plate (Refer to the CC-5 Installation Instructions, P/N ). Do not install the card guides in the CC-5 at this time. The Mounting Plate may be located either IN or OUT of the enclosure to perform this installation procedure. If the Mounting Plate is located IN the enclosure you will have to gain access to it by opening the enclosure Inner and Outer doors. If the Mounting Plate is located outside of the enclosure, place it in front of you so that the word TOP is at the top and away from you. CAB Component CAB ENCLOSURE COMPONENTS Description / Color Installation Instruction Part Number CAB1-X Complete CAB1-X Single Row* Enclosure - Black CAB2-BB CAB3-BB CAB2-XBD CAB3-XBD CAB-MP CAB1-TK CAB2-TK CAB3-TK CAB2 Two Row Backbox - Black CAB3 Three Row Backbox - Black CAB2 Transponder Door for Two Row Backbox - Black CAB3 Transponder Door for Three Row Backbox - Black Mounting Plate for CAB enclosures -Silver (OPTIONAL in the CAB2 and CAB3 - One CAB-MP is needed for each CAB Row, if used) Flush Trim Kit for CAB1-COM - Black Flush Trim Kit for CAB2 - Black Flush Trim Kit for CAB3 - Black *A Single Row has the capacity to mount up to 4 modules using the CAB-MP Mounting Plate.

37 Chapter 2 Installation Outer Door CAB3-XBD Backbox CAB3-BB One Row One Module Position PSC-12 Two Module Positions CC-5 Each CAB Backbox Row requires a CAB-MP in order to mount modules CC-5 Cards: HUB-4 NIC-C Figure 2-8 CAB3 Enclosure Row And Module Positions 5. Install the PSC-12 on a CAB-MP mounting plate (Refer to the PSC-12 Installation Instructions, P/N ). 6. Install the PTB in the bottom of the CAB enclosure (Refer to the PTB Installation Instructions, P/N ). 7. Install Field Wiring. Dress the field wiring that will be going to the CC-5. Strip the insulation from the wiring, but do not connect the wires to the screw terminals. 8. If the PSC-12 and CC-5 were installed on the CAB-MP OUT of the enclosure, mount the complete assembly in the CAB row. 9. Connect Field Wiring to CC-5 screw terminals, as appropriate. 10. Install card guides in CC Install the NIC-C in a CC-5, if applicable (Refer to the NIC-C Installation Instructions, P/N ). 12. Install the HUB-4 in a CC-5, if applicable (Refer to the HUB-4 Installation Instructions, P/N ). 2-11

38 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 13. On the PSC-12, set the circuit breaker for the battery to the OFF position. Verify that the AC dedicated circuit breaker is turned off at the mains. 14. Connect the AC mains and battery wiring to the PTB. 15. Connect the PTB output to the PSC Turn on the dedicated circuit breaker. 17. Turn on the PSC-12 circuit breaker for the battery. 18. The System will initialize in default mode. 19. Using the NCC-G, transfer the site-specific program to the COM-1 system. Refer to this manual for further information. Upon completion, the system will automatically initialize. 20. Any problem found will be reported in the NCC-G. Identify all discrepancies and correct them until the system reports SYSTEM STATUS: NORMAL. COM-1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Network (HNET) with NCC2F The HNET connections are made on terminals 1-4 of the terminal block on the rear of the second NCC-2F (addressed as COM-1). The primary pair (or network A) is on terminals 1 and 2. The secondary pair (or network B) is on terminals 3 and 4. Connect only the primary pair. For Style 4 networks, install a 120 ohm EOLR between terminals 1 and 2, and between 3 and 4. See Figure 2-9 for NCC-2F HNET connections. For Style 7 networks, connect to both the primary and secondary pairs. See Figure 2-9 for wiring details. Computer Connection with NCC-2F (Refer to Figure 2-9 or 2-10, as applicable) After the NCC-2F card has been configured and properly connected, follow the steps listed below: 1. Connect the monitor to the power outlet and to the video outlet on the main unit. 2. Connect the system printer to the NCCG parallel printer port 1 (LPT1). The printer cable cannot leave the room in which the NCC-G is located. For a UL listed installation, a model PAL-1 parallel printer is required. 2-12

39 Chapter 2 Installation 3. Connect the software key to the NCC-G parallel printer port 2 (LPT2). The part numbers for the NCC-G graphics packages are shown in the following table: NCC Graphics Package Part Number Number Of Nodes NCC-GL NCC-1G NCC-2G NCC-3G NCC-4G NCCWAN1G NCCWAN2G NCCWAN3G NCCWAN4G NCCWAN5G * NCCWAN6G * NCCWAN7G S C68-A * * Nodes above 64 cannot be on XNET. 4. Connect the computer into the power outlet. NOTE: Prior to powering-up the computer, remove all diskettes from the A: drive. 5. Power up the computer and the color monitor. Check to see that the computer system goes through power up diagnostics. * * EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/2W, 5% P/N * NETWORK A (PRIMARY) SUPERVISED NETWORK B (SECONDARY) SUPERVISED OMIT THIS PAIR FOR STYLE 4 TB NETWORK A (PRIMARY) SUPERVISED NCC-2F NIC-C NOTES: 1. The screw terminals can accommodate one 12-24AWG or two16-24awg. 2. From the NCC-2F to NIC-C: 2000 feet (33.8 ohms) max. per pair between CC-5s/CC- 2s.. Unshielded twisted pair.25μf max. line to line Shielded twisted pair.15μf max. line to line.2μf max. line to shield 3. Use twisted pair or twisted shielded pair. Figure 2-9 NCC-2F HNET Connections ONE SLOT OF CC-5 4. Terminate shields at one and only one NIC-C. 5. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC Maximum voltage 8V P-P. 7. Maximum current 75mA during message transmission. 8. Each pair independently supervised. 9. Positive or negative ground fault detected at <10K ohms on pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 of the NIC-C. 2-13

40 * * * * NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual * EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/2W, 5% P/N NETWORK A (PRIMARY) SUPERVISED NETWORK B (SECONDARY) SUPERVISED OMIT THIS PAIR FOR STYLE 4 * EOLR 120 OHMS, 1/2W, 5% P/N NETWORK A (PRIMARY) SUPERVISED DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE DO NOT USE TB NCC-2F SEE NOTE 7 DO NOT USE SEE NOTE 7 DO NOT USE SEE NOTE 7 DO NOT USE FIRST NIC-C LAST NIC-C ONE SLOT OF CC-5/CC-2 ONE SLOT OF CC-5/CC-2 ONE SLOT OF CC-5/CC DO NOT USE NOTES: 1. The screw terminals can accommodate one 12-24AWG or two16-24awg. 2. From the NCC-2F to NIC-C: 2000 feet (33.8 ohms) max. per pair between CC-5s/CC- 2s.. Unshielded twisted pair.25μf max. line to line Shielded twisted pair.15μf max. line to line.2μf max. line to shield 3. Use twisted pair or twisted shielded pair. DO NOT USE Figure 2-10 NCC-2F HNET Connections for Multiple CABs DO NOT USE 4. Terminate shields at one and only one NIC-C. 5. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC Maximum voltage 8V P-P. 7. Maximum current 75mA during message transmission. 8. Each pair independently supervised. 9. Positive or negative ground fault detected at <10K ohms on pins 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 of the NIC-C. 10. For Style 4, remove jumper P2 on all NIC-Cs except on the NIC-C that is connected to the NCC-2F card. For Style 7, remove jumpers P2 and P4 on all NIC-Cs except on the NIC-C that is connected to the NCC-2F card. 2-14

41 Chapter 2 Installation SCD-19LT-2 LCD Monitor (rear view) See Notes 3&4 DC12V TOUCH VGA VIDEO Parallel Printer (rear view) AC Main 120 VAC 60Hz 12V 5A Power Supply PIN 1 - Fault Out PIN 2 - Fault COM TRI Installed in MXL See Note VAC/60 Hz See Notes 3 and 5 AC Main 120 VAC 60Hz Flexible Conduit (User Supplied) Conduit Junction Box (user supplied) Computer (rear view) Keyboard & Mouse (Using Splitter Cable) LPT 2 See NCC-2F Installation Instructions, P/N (Default COM Post Assignment Shown) * For NCCWAN Only LAN 2 NCC-2F COM 5* NCC-2F COM 3 SOUND CARD SERIAL PORTS PARALLEL PORT USB PORTS CPU CARD MONITOR CARD (For NCC Key) LPT 1 Junction Box and Cover (user supplied) Approved Flexible Conduit Connector (user supplied) Bushing (user supplied) Approved 1/2 Flexible Metallic/Nonmetallic Conduit (user supplied) Power Connection Box (not required for Rack Mount or Console Installations) LAN 1 NOTES: 1. NCC-2F card is installed in a PCI slot and is set for COM3 (XNET) or COM5 (HNET). 2. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the computer's keyboard and mouse ports following the computer's installation instructions. 3. NFPA 72 Proprietary and Local System installation requires that the computer, monitor, and printer be UL rated for fire (refer to appendix for PCs). 4. The computer is supervised for power and connection to MXL and XLS. 5. The printer is supervised for AC, on/off line, paper out, paper jam, and connection to the computer by NCC-G software at the computer. 6. All circuits are power limited. 7. Cable must be in rigid conduit and cannot leave the room. 8. Shielded cable is not recommended. 9. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC Maximum voltage: 24V peak to peak. 11. Maximum current: 20mA per circuit. 12. LPT2 has software key. 13. The COM Port on the Main CPU is disabled. The Serial Port on the Serial Parallel Adapter card takes on the identification of COM If you are using model SCD-XP/XPWAN-B, the touch screen controller card is not installed. 15. Pin 1 & 2 of the LPT2 board can be wired to a TRI module to monitor the status of the computer's CPU. Figure 2-11 SCD-XP/XPWAN-B/BT With NCC-2F And SCD-19LT-2 Connection Diagram - Suitable For Rack Mount or Console Installations COM 2 COM 1 Video 2-15

42 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Power Connection Box Approved Flexible Conduit Connector (user supplied) SCD-19LT-2 Power Cord Plugs In To Computer Parallel Printer (rear view) Approved 1/2 Flexible Metallic/Nonmetallic Conduit (user supplied) Bushing (user supplied) AC Main 120 VAC 60Hz 12V 5A Power Supply DC12V LCD Monitor (rear view) See Notes 3&4 TOUCH VGA VIDEO PIN 1 - Fault Out PIN 2 - Fault COM TRI Installed in MXL See Note VAC/60 Hz Computer (rear view) Keyboard & Mouse (Using Splitter Cable) See Notes 3 and 5 LPT 2 AC Main 120 VAC 60Hz Flexible Conduit (User Supplied) Conduit Junction Box (user supplied) See NCC-2F Installation Instructions, P/N (Default COM Post Assignment Shown) * For NCCWAN Only LAN 1 LAN 2 NCC-2F COM 5* NCC-2F COM 3 SOUND CARD SERIAL PORTS PARALLEL PORT USB PORTS CPU CARD MONITOR CARD (For NCC Key) LPT 1 Junction Box and Cover (user supplied) Approved Flexible Conduit Connector (user supplied) Bushing (user supplied) Approved 1/2 Flexible Metallic/Nonmetallic Conduit (user supplied) Power Connection Box required for Desk Mount Installations Figure 2-12 SCD-XP/XPWAN-B/BT With NCC-2F And SCD-19LT-2 Connection Diagram - Suitable For Desk Mount Installations COM 2 COM 1 Video NOTES: 1. NCC-2F card is installed in a PCI slot and is set for COM3 (XNET) or COM5 (HNET). 2. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the computer's keyboard and mouse ports following the computer's installation instructions. 3. NFPA 72 Proprietary and Local System installation requires that the computer, monitor, and printer be UL rated for fire (refer to appendix for PCs). 4. The computer is supervised for power and connection to MXL and XLS. 5. The printer is supervised for AC, on/off line, paper out, paper jam, and connection to the computer by NCC-G software at the computer. 6. All circuits are power limited. 7. Cable must be in rigid conduit and cannot leave the room. 8. Shielded cable is not recommended. 9. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC Maximum voltage: 24V peak to peak. 11. Maximum current: 20mA per circuit. 12. LPT2 has software key. 13. The COM Port on the Main CPU is disabled. The Serial Port on the Serial Parallel Adapter card takes on the identification of COM If you are using model SCD-XP/XPWAN-B the touch screen controller card is not installed. 15. Pin 1 & 2 of the LPT2 board can be wired to a TRI module to monitor the status of the computer's CPU. 2-16

43 I Chapter 2 Installation SCD-19LT-2 LCD MONITOR (REAR VIEW) SEE NOTES 2&3 12V 5A POWER SUPPLY VGA VIDEO AC MAIN 120 VAC 60Hz TOUCH DC12V FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (USER SUPPLIED) JUNCTION BOX (USER SUPPLIED) AC MAIN 120 VAC 60Hz 0.5A MAX CONDUIT TOUCH SCREEN FOR MONITOR 2& 4(USB0 / USB1) VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO COM1 USB0 TO SCALANCE X204-2 FIBER SWITCH IN FIRE COMMAND CENTER (LAN1) USB4 LAN2 SPEAKER PARALLEL PRINTER (REAR VIEW) DVI DVI DVI LPT2 LAN1 SOFTWARE KEY (LPT2) USB1 USB3 LPT1 KEYBRD COM2 CENTRONICS PARALLEL 120 VAC/60 Hz KEYBOARD & MOUSE (USING SPLITTER CABLE) 115v O MONITOR 2 (42 SMOKE-CTRL-42-TLCD*) SCD-DUAL-CORE (REAR VIEW) SEE NOTES 2&4 MONITOR 4 (42 SMOKE-CTRL-42-TLCD*) PAL-1 PRINTER TO LPT1 * REFER TO THE LCD SMOKE CONTROL INSTALLATION & PROGRAMMING MANUAL, P/N , FOR MOUNTING INFORMATION. NOTES: 6. Cable must be in rigid conduit and cannot leave the room. 7. Shielded cable is not recommended. 8. Power limited to NFPA 70 per NEC LPT2 has software key. 10. Pin 1 & 2 of the LPT2 board can be wired to an HTRI module to monitor the status of the computer's CPU. 1. Connect the keyboard and mouse to the computer's keyboard and mouse ports following the computer's installation instructions. 2. NFPA 72 Proprietary and Local System installation requires that the computer, monitor, and printer be UL rated for fire (refer to appendix for PCs). 3. The computer is supervised for power and connection to XLS. 4. The printer is supervised for AC, on/off line, paper out, paper jam, and connection to the computer by NCC-G software at the computer. 5. All circuits are power limited. Figure 2-13 NCC Multiple Monitor Connection Diagram - Suitable For Desk Mount Installations 2-17

44 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Touch Screen Installation The Touch Screen comes preinstalled in Model SCD-XP/XPWAN-BT. Uninterruptible Power Supply (For Application In U.S.A.) If an Uninterruptible Power Supply is required for your system configuration, a UL-1481 listed UPS must be used. Use the tables below to determine the recommended UPS for your application. Per UL requirements, 4 hours of standby operation is required if there is a backup generator. If there is no backup generator, then 24 hours of standby is required. Use the following table to calculate the total current draw of your system: EQUIPMENT CURRENT DRAW (A) SCD-XP-B 1. 2 SCD-XPWAN-B 1. 2 SCD-XP-BT 1. 2 SCD-XPWAN-BT 1. 2 SCD-19L SCD-19LT SMOKE-CTRL-DUAL-CORE 1. 5 SCD-DUAL-CORE 1. 5 SMOKE-CTRL-42-TLCD 1.97 UHW T-L 5 UHW L-L 5 UHW T-L 1.97 UHW L-L 1.97 QUANTIT Y GRAND TOTAL: TOTAL CURRENT (CURRENT X QUANTITY) Using the grand total value obtained above, refer to the following table to select the recommended UPS for your application: CURRENT (A) BACKUP TIME (h) LA MARCHE UPS MODELS (UL-1481 Listed) BATTERY CAPACITY (Ah) 2 4 A32P VBC-A A32P VBC-A A32P VBC-A A32P VBC-A A32P-1K-48VBC-A A32P-1K-48VBC-A A32P-1.5K-48VBC-A A32P-1.5K-48VBC-A A32P-1.5K-48VBC-A A32P-2K-48VBC-A A32P-1.5K-48VBC-A A32P-3K-48VBC-A Battery capacity listed is the minimum required to achieve the backup time with the listed current. 2. For more information conatct La Marche Manufacturing Company at

45 Chapter 2 Installation Security Key Attachment The security keys for NCCG systems are as follows: NCC-1G: 1-16 nodes NCC-2G: 1-32 nodes NCC-3G: 1-48 nodes NCC-4G: 1-64 nodes NCC-5G: nodes (Note: Nodes above 64 cannot be on XNET.) NCC-6G: nodes (Note: Nodes above 64 cannot be on XNET.) NCC-7G: nodes (Note: Nodes above 64 cannot be on XNET.) NCC-16G: 16 node increment (See Installation Instructions P/N ) NCC-GL: 1 node NCC-GL1: Upgrade from a single node to a 16-network node system (See Installation Instructions P/N ) No Security Key Detected The startup of the NCC system entails the use of a valid security key. If the key driver SENTINEL.SYS is missing from the configuration file registry, or if the driver cannot be located on the computer, the NCCG will enter a degraded mode of operation. If the driver is present and loaded, then it is used to scan for any keys that are attached. If no valid key (one with a CP signature) is found, then the NCCG will again enter a degraded mode of operation, as shown in the following screens. Figure 2-14 NCC-G/NCCWAN and NCC-GL Security Key Error Default Screens Degrade Security Startup The NCC is a part of a life safety system, and as such, the failure of a security key should not prevent the system from performing those basic functions required to preserve life and property. To this end, the NCCG will start up and monitor a system even if the security key is missing; however, some features will not be available and a reminder message will be periodically displayed. 2-19

46 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual If the NCCG has never had a valid key connected to it, a dialog box will be displayed at startup allowing the user to specify a general mode of operation (GL, Text, Graphics). This value will not be saved in the NCCG s initialization file, therefore, on every restart the same question will be asked. If the NCCG had been operating with a valid key and the software driver (SENTINEL.SYS) is loaded, then the stored value for that key will be used to configure the system. The user will be prompted five times that the key is missing and then the NCCG will startup with limited editing ability and its reminder message. To allow for a demo mode of operation, the degraded condition of the NCCG will vary slightly between the condition of a missing driver and a missing key. If the driver is missing, then the general mode query box will always be displayed on startup. In other words, a mode of operation (NCC-G or NCC-GL) can be chosen, however some features will not be made available. Security Key Feature Value The NCCG will automatically accept a new key or key combination that offers more features than the version previously installed (for example, upgrading from an NCC-GL to NCC-G). If a key or key combination offering less features (for example, going from NCC-G to NCC-GL) is detected, then a warning dialog is displayed that asks the operator to accept or ignore the change, as shown in the following screen. Figure 2-15 Security Key Values Changed Screen If accepted, then the capabilities of the NCCG are reduced to the new feature set. If ignored, then the NCCG will resume using the previous package; however, warning messages will be generated at 30 minute intervals. 2-20

47 Chapter 2 Installation Printer Installation For Computers Using Windows To install a printer on a computer that DOES NOT have NCCG preinstalled: The logging printer must be installed using the Microsoft Windows printer driver. 1. Click on Start and select Settings - Printers and Faxes. 2. Click on Add Printer. The Add Printer Wizard appears (see below) and asks how the printer will be managed. Click on Next. Figure 2-16 Windows Add Printer Welcome Screen 3. Select Local printer attached to this computer, Unselect Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer and click on Next (see below). Figure 2-17 Windows Local or Network Printer 2-21

48 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 4. Select LPT1: as the port and click Next (see below). Figure 2-18 Windows Printer Port Selection 5. Scroll down the Manufacturer's List and select Generic. Then select Generic/ Text Only in the Printers column (see below). Click on Next. Figure 2-19 Windows Printer Software Selection 6. Select Yes for "Do you want your Windows-based programs to use this printer as the default printer?" Click on Next. 7. Select Do not share this printer to indicate this printer will not be shared with other network users. Click on Next. 2-22

49 Chapter 2 Installation Figure 2-20 Windows Printer Sharing 8. Select Yes for "Would you like to print a test page?". Click on Next. Figure 2-21 Windows Printer Test Page 9. You will be asked to insert your Windows disk to complete the installation. Close the Windows installation program if it automatically boots up. 10. Click on Finish. 2-23

50 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual TO INSTALL THE LOGGING PRINTER IN THE NCC: From the NCC operator display, select (single click) the MORE button. In the MORE COMMANDS dialog box which appears, select (single click) the SETUP command. In the SETUP dialog box which appears, select (single click) the SYSTEM button. In the notebook which appears select the PRINTERS page by selecting (single clicking) the PRINTERS tab. The following window appears: Figure 2-22 Printers Setup Screen: Event Logging Select LPT1 for the event logging printer by clicking on the up or down arrows until the field shows LPT1. Do the same for the Report Printer unless another printer will be designated for lists and reports. NOTE: If LPT1 is also used for the Report Printer, the Job Properties option will be inactive. NOTE: LPT1, the default event logging printer, must never have a print manager assignment made against it or it will not print properly. Print managers can be assigned for any other printer. Select (single click) DONE to exit out of each level of the command. Printer Emphasis NOTE: If printers other than the default printer provided are used, it is at the owner's risk. Refer to the Windows printer installation instructions for further information. 2-24

51 Chapter 2 Installation The Printer Emphasis option enables the logging printer to print specific event types (alarm, trouble, etc.) in color. This allows event types to stand out on a log report. Activate this option by clicking the Emphasis button on the printer set up menu. The following screen will appear: Figure 2-23 Printer Emphasis Settings Selector Click on the Emphasis Printing Enabled box to activate this feature (confirmed by a check appearing in the box). All the control strings shown in the screen above are the defaults for the UL listed logging printer (Model PAL-1). If you are using a printer model other than PAL-1, refer to the manual that accompanies the printer to change the settings appropriately. Click the Save button to save the control string information. Then, click on the presets button and the following screen will appear: Figure 2-24 Printer Emphasis Presets From this window choose the printer type and click the Apply button. NOTE: If you are using the PAL-1 printer (purchased from SIEMENS) choose the PAL-1 (Dot Matrix) model. 2-25

52 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual To install a graphics output only printer (optional): Follow the standard windows installation procedure to install a graphics output only printer. NCCG Graphic Printer Setup After installing the graphics printer in Windows, log on to the NCCG System to set up the NCCG program to recognize the printer. (Note: Password Level D is required for NCCG System Settings.) From the NCCG operator display, select (single click) the MORE button. In the MORE COMMANDS dialog box which appears, select (single click) the SETUP command. In the SETUP dialog box which appears, select (single click) the SYSTEM button. In the notebook which appears select the PRINTERS page by selecting (single clicking) the PRINTERS tab. The following window appears: Figure 2-25 Printers Setup Screen: Graphics Printer Select any installed Windows printer from the drop-down window in the Graphics Event Printer field. Additional detail on the Graphics Event Printer options can be found in Chapter 4. Template Placement The NCCG packages are shipped with various keyboard templates as shown in the table below. Refer to the figure on the next page for the correct placement of templates on the keyboard. Only three of the templates are required and the selection of templates is based on the UL listed system types. NOTE: Template #3 is not used with NFPA 72 Local - Campus. 2-26

53 Chapter 2 Installation Figure 2-26 NCC-G/GL Template Placement UL LISTED SYSTEM TYPE AND TEMPLATE SELECTION Configuration NCCG Operation Template Part Numbers Keyboard Location (See Fig. 38) NFPA 72 Local - Campus The NCCG is in a monitoring mode ONLY. The remote MXL/XLS node(s) are configured as standalone 72 Local - Campus panel(s). Local control is through the MXL's MKB or XLSs PMI. The NCCG displays the current values of analog voltage, sensitivities, etc. The NCCG cannot directly acknowledge, silence, or reset a remote node C C NFPA 72 Local - Highrise NFPA 72 Proprietary The NCCG is the primary control point for an MXL/XLS node or a collection of MXL/XLS nodes. It is capable of block acknowledge, query, and control of the system. The remote MXL/XLS node(s) are configured as 72 Local - Highrise unit(s) and may contain their own annunciators (MKB/PMI). No local control is possible at a remote MKB/PMI unless its node is out of communication with the NCCG. The NCCG is the primary control point for an MXL/XLS node or a collection of MXL/XLS nodes. It is capable of top event acknowledge, query, and control of the system. The remote MXL/XLS node(s) are configured as 72 Proprietary unit(s) and may contain their own annunciators (MKB/PMI). Control is possible from a remote location using an MKB/PMI that is behind a locked door C C C C C C NOTE: Keyboard Templates with part numbers ending in "C" are reduced in size to fit on the Comark compute r keyboard. If you are converting from NCC OS/2 to NCCNT, all keyboard templates remain applicable. IMPORTANT: For all configurations listed above, the NCC and all attached MXLs and XLSs must have the same network settings or configuration troubles will occur. 2-27

54 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 2-28

55 CHAPTER 3 Operator Display 3 Operator Display Introduction Once all MXL/XLS and WAIO node(s) are powered up, the NCCG displays global system information as it occurs and allows the operator to enter commands to control the system or view specific data within the system. The NCCG monitors for the existence of all remote node(s) that were programmed into it using the NETWORK command under the system SETUP menu. (See description of the MORE button in Chapter 4.) It also announces its existence at the node address that was entered at configuration time. The operator display on the main screen has six regions as shown in Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2. They are the Status Line, the Browser Window, the Graphics Window, the Event Window, the Button Array, and the System Node Status Bar. GRAPHICS WINDOW BUTTON ARRAY STATUS LINE BROWSER WINDOW EVENT WINDOW SYSTEM NODE STATUS BAR Figure 3-1 NCC Graphics Main Screen 3-1

56 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual GRAPHICS WINDOW BUTTON ARRAY STATUS LINE BROWSER WINDOW EVENT WINDOW Figure 3-2 NCC-GL Main Screen SYSTEM NODE STATUS BAR System Status Line This area displays the status of the MXL/XLS system and NCCG, including: ALR=x Indicates the number of active alarms SUP=x Indicates the number of active supervisories SEC=x Indicates the number of active security alarms STA=x Indicates the number of status conditions (display is optional, see Chapter 4 - System Settings: Display Tab and Device Edit: Options) TRB=x Indicates the number of trouble conditions ACK=x Indicates the number of acknowledgments pending <system status message> (located within < > ) This message normally displays <System Normal>. The table below lists system status messages in descending display priority. If a condition of higher priority occurs, its respective message replaces the one that is currently displayed. The lowest ranked message is <System Normal> and displays only if no other condition exists. (Refer to System Status Messages Table.) L=x Indicates the password level of the current operator, where x is either level A through D or an asterisk (*) for the locked system level. Time and Date Indicates the current time and date. The seconds display is manipulated by direct program control. This gives the operator a direct indication that the monitoring program is functioning. GF Indicates that the ground fault detected on the connection to a fire panel on WAN network. HM Indicates that this NCC is a HNET Master on the WAN network. 3-2

57 CHAPTER 3 Operator Display SYSTEM STATUS MESSAGES P rinter Fail Printer is disconnected, turned off, or out of paper. N etwork Fail The NCC-G cannot make contact with any remote node. Disk Fail The system hard drive has failed or experienced a read/write failure. F an Fail The cooling fan is running slow or failed. H igh Temp A high temperature within the computer exists. ALR Pending SUP Pending STA Pending TRB Pending SEC Pending There are one list window. There are one or more the event list window. There are one or more event list window. There are one or more event list window. There are one or more event list window. or more alarms pending acknowledgment outside the event supervisories pending acknowledgment outside status points pending acknowledgment outside troubles pending acknowledgment outside securities pending acknowledgment outside the the the H NET Fail The system has lost communication to the HNET modules. HNET Mast Fail The HNET Master NCC is not responding to the backup NCC. H NET BkUp Fail The HNET Backup NCC is not responding to the NCC. Disarmed Devices Off Normal System Normal One or more nodes, modules, or Some off-normal cases. detectors are disarmed in the system. condition which does not meet one of the above special System is polling. All nodes are connected. No nodes or detectors are disarmed. Printer is connected and on-line. The Browser Window This area displays a tree list of either all images in the database or all devices in the database. It has two tabs, Images and Devices. Images Tab - When you click on an image name in the Browser Window, the Browser Pane (the bottom half of the Graphics Window) displays the image with the first assigned device (Refer to Figure 3-3, Browser Image View - Single Device). To show all devices, right click on the image name and select "Show All Devices" (Refer to Figure 3-4, Browser Image View - All Devices.) If the image has devices assigned to it, a "+" appears to the left of the image name. Click on the "+" to expand the tree and display all devices assigned to this image. Click on one of the devices to display only that device in the browser pane. 3-3

58 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 3-3 Browser Image View - Single Device Figure 3-4 Browser Image View - All Devices 3-4

59 CHAPTER 3 Operator Display Devices Tab - This displays a list of nodes, modules, devices and components in the database. Click on the "+" to the left of the Node name or double click on the Node name to expand the tree and display all of the modules assigned to this node. Then, click on the "+" to the left of the Module name or double click on the Module name to expand the tree and display all of the devices assigned to this module. Then, click on the "+" to the left of the Device name or double click on the Device name to expand the tree and view that device's components list. When you click on a device, the browser pane shows a thumbnail view of all images assigned for all zoom levels to that device (refer to Figure 3-5, Device view With Thumbnail Images). When you select a thumbnail view, the image for that level will fill the browser pane and the device appears on that image (refer to Figure 3-6, Device View With Image Selected). The Device View uses node configuration data to show devices. XL3 nodes do not contain configuration data and will not appear in this view. Figure 3-5 Device View With Thumbnail Images 3-5

60 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 3-6 Device View With Image Selected To switch between the two views, click on either the "Devices" tab to display the device view tree, or the "Images" tab to display the image view tree. NOTE: To display the Browser Window and Pane, you must select "Enable Graphics Browser" in the System Settings> Display Tab (refer to Chapter 4). Once the graphics browser is enabled, use the "Browse On" and "Browse Off" buttons in the More commands window to hide or show the Browser Window and Pane. When the browser window is configured to display on a separate display monitor, the Browser On/Off buttons are disabled. The Graphics Window This area displays a graphic or map associated with the selected event. An appropriate icon flashes to show the exact location and type of event. The user can scroll the graphic image to view other areas or reduce the system event window to reveal more of the displayed graphic. NOTE: If the event currently selected does not have a set of graphic images associated with it, the NO IMAGE FOR THIS EVENT banner displays. The Event Window The event window is located below the graphics window. All system events (alarms, troubles, etc.) are listed in this window in chronological order by event type. A leading ICON is marked with a check mark when the event is acknowledged. See Figure 3-9 for Event Icon Descriptions. The information in this window 3-6

61 CHAPTER 3 Operator Display can be scrolled up or down to view items that are outside the current view. The event window can also be resized to allow for a greater number of events to be displayed. The message format is shown below: EVENT TYPE EVENT STATE STANDARD DEVICE NAME (NODE:MODULE:DEVICE) DATE TIME CUSTOM MESSAGE Figure 3-7 Event Window Format EVENT TYPE ALARM - displayed in red SUPERVISORY - displayed in blue SECURITY - displayed in magenta TROUBLE - displayed in yellow STATUS - displayed in light blue EVENT STATE - either IN or OUT PLACE WHERE EVENT WAS ACKNOWLEDGED LC - local (i.e., at the NCC-G) RM - remote (at the MXL panel) L? - acknowledged locally, but message could not be delivered to the remote panel because of a line break, etc. STANDARD DEVICE NAME MXL - NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER: DEVICE NUMBER XLS - The XLS format will be one of the following: NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER^COMPONENT WAIO - NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER.SUBMODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER NODE NUMBER:WAIO MODULE NUMBER-WAIO DEVICE NUMBER 3-7

62 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual DATE - day:month:year TIME - hour (24 hour format):minute:second CUSTOM MESSAGE - The custom message is either the default assigned in the panel configuration tool, CSGM (Custom Software Generator) for MXL, Zeus for XLS, or one assigned at the NCCG Device Edit window. The NCCG assigned message will override a custom message assigned in the panel configuration tool. THE EVENT WINDOW WITH DISPLAY NODE NAME OPTION When the Display Node Name option is turned on, the Event Window has a different format to make room for the node name (refer to Figure 3-8). EVENT TYPE NODE NAME CUSTOM MESSAGE EVENT STATE STANDARD DEVICE NAME (NODE:MODULE:DEVICE) DATE & TIME TROUBLE TYPE (TROUBLES ONLY) Figure 3-8 Event Window Format - Display Node Name Option The event type text is abbreviated in this format and displays as follows: EVENT TYPE ALR - displayed in red SUP - displayed in blue SEC - displayed in magenta TRB - displayed in yellow STA - displayed in light blue Special Cases (Does Not Apply to NCC-GL) See Appendix E for examples and information. 3-8

63 CHAPTER 3 Operator Display ALARM SECURITY ALARM ACK D ALARM OUT ALARM OUT ACK D SECURITY ACK D SECURITY OUT SECURITY OUT ACK D SUPERVISORY TROUBLE SUPERVISORY ACK D SUPERVISORY OUT SUPERVISORY OUT ACK D TROUBLE ACK D TROUBLE OUT TROUBLE OUT ACK D STATUS STATUS OFF STATUS ACK'D STATUS OFF ACK'D Figure 3-9 Event Icon Descriptions System Node Status Bar A node is one fire alarm control panel represented by a network address. For more information refer to Chapter 4, Basic Configuration - Network. This status bar at the bottom of the screen is used to indicate the general state of node(s) attached to the NCCG. Each rectangular icon represents a node or group of nodes and changes color and text to indicate normal (green), alarm (red), supervisory (blue), security (magenta), status (light blue), or trouble (yellow) activations. The color and text state also reflects the synchronization process with the MXL/ XLS network. Upon initialization, the node box appears yellow with an X through it. When the NCC begins to hear the heartbeat of the MMB/PMI, the node box 3-9

64 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual turns an olive color and the X is removed. At this point, the NCC only hears the MMB/PMI and synchronization has not begun. Once the NCC begins to communicate back to the MMB/PMI, the node box turns to a cyan (greenish blue) color. Synchronization has begun. The nodes will turn cyan in the order that the MMB's/ PMI's heartbeat is heard by the NCC. Once synchronization has begun, the NCC will begin to download the CSG-M from each MXL panel. If the CSG-M has been changed since the last download, the node box will appear in a bright green color with a percentage sign. The percentage sign provides benchmarks on the process of the CSG-M download. Upon successful completion of the CSG-M download, the node box will turn back to cyan, then to the color of the state of the MXL (for example, green for normal; red for alarm). If there is more than one NCC on the network, only the lowest address NCC will download the CSGM out of the MXL panels. Other network NCCs must have their CSGM files manually imported using the MORE> SETUP CSG/Zeus Import command. If you always want to manually import all CSGM files, check "Inhibit Automatic Configuration Download" in the MORE> SYSTEM SETTINGS> OPTIONS tab. (refer to Chapter 4, System Settings Window - Options Tab). NCCWAN systems must manually import MXL CSGM configurations for all nodes that are connected by HUB-4s. NOTE: The CSG-M does not contain configuration information for XLS nodes. You must manually copy the ZEUS.xml file and import it. (The file name is limited to 8 characters for MXL panels only.) If the synchronization is not successful, the node button will remain in the cyan color. If more than one node button is cyan for more than sixty seconds, there may be a network communications problem. When all synchronization attempts fail on a node, it will return to an olive drab color indicating an unknown condition exists. Clicking on a particular node button pops up a dialog box providing further information about the Node and enables the operator to DISCONNECT, CONNECT, ACKNOWLEDGE, SILENCE, RESET or SHOW the node as shown in Figure 3-10 (refer to Chapter 5, System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box). Each node button is push on/push off. Additional buttons display on a multiple NCC system to either REQUEST control or MONITOR a node using the Request/Grant/Deny Transfer of Control (refer to Chapter 5, Command Request Dialog Box) Figure 3-10 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box

65 CHAPTER 3 Operator Display The DISCONNECT and CONNECT buttons appear only for XNET network connected nodes. For nodes connected through a HUB-4, the dialog box will appear as in Figure For more information, refer to Chapter 5, Displaying Event Information - By Node. Figure 3-11 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box HUB-4 Connected Node The appearance and operation of WAIO system nodes is described on page Upon initialization, a WAIO system node will appear yellow with an "X" through it. When the NCC hears from the WAIOs, it will update the individual WAIO node modules and the WAIO system node. No synchronization process occurs for WAIOs as the initial communications contains all needed WAIO data. Configurations for WAIOs are kept at the NCC and not at the WAIO. Therefore, configuration downloads do not occur for WAIO nodes or modules. or or or or or or or or or or or + Figure 3-12 The Button Array 3-11

66 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The Button Array The various buttons to the right of the graphics and event windows are used to control the system and are activated using either a touch screen or a mouse. The buttons visible on the main screen are ACK, SILENCE, RESET, ZOOM IN, ZOOM OUT, NEXT, PREV, LOG ON, SHOW, USER and MORE. Each of these functions can also be accessed using function keys listed next to the button array. For more information about these functions, refer to the CONFIGURATION and OPERATION sections of this manual. Control Point Window To Acknowledge, Arm and Disarm or add a comment for a single device, either: Click on the icon on an event in the event display, or Click on a device on a graphic A Control Point Window appears with the custom message as the text. Figure 3-13 Control Point Window For A Device In the Control Point Window, a device's input or output can be disarmed or armed using the Disable and Enable buttons. Enter a comment in the "Enter Optional Comment" area. This information will be recorded on the printer and in the history log when the user closes the window by pressing the End/Comment button. Pressing the Acknowledge button will selectively acknowledge the event and close the box. The Acknowledge button is only active if the selected device is not acknowledged. To enter new comments, open a new Control Point Window. The Select buttons are only active for an XLS, as shown in Figure

67 CHAPTER 3 Operator Display Figure 3-14 Control Point Window - XLS Device With Components Click on the Select button in the Input Control section to display the Input Components Control window, shown in the figure below. Select the input components that you want disarmed/armed by checking the appropriate check box(s) and click either the Disable or Enable button. Likewise, click on the Select button in the Output Control section to display the Output Components Control window. Select the output components that you want disarmed/armed by checking the appropriate check box(s) and click either the Disable or Enable button. Figure 3-15 Input Components Control Window Figure 3-16 Output Components Control Window 3-13

68 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual NCC Multi Monitor Support The NCC can be set up for multi monitor support (refer to Chapter 4, NCC System Settings - Display Tab for configuration information). Multiple screens enable the user to display floor plans in response to floor button clicks. To pan or scale floor plans in the window of one of these screens, use the following buttons as described below. Refer to Figure Click on this button to zoom in. Click on this button to zoom out. Click on this button to return to the original size. Figure 3-17 Multi Monitor Floor Plan Example If there is an Alarm event on the displayed floor, the alarm initiating device is displayed and centered on the floor plan. Click on the device to display a window with the device address and a complete custom message as shown in Figure Click the Done button to close the window Figure 3-18 Device Address With Custom Message

69 Chapter 4 Configuration 4 Configuration Basic Configuration - System NOTE: Full system configuration features can only be accessed by password level D. Refer to the following sections of this manual for further information: Operator Logon Names and Passwords, page 4-15 Setup - Logon Tab, pages Off-Line System Configuration Use this procedure to "disconnect" the NCC from the network (the NCC will not have control of the system). This is helpful when adding or editing system configurations, including custom device messages, graphics and icons. Press + to close the NCC and go to the Windows desktop. Go to the MS DOS Command Prompt either by double clicking on the Command Prompt icon or clicking on Start > Programs > Command prompt. From C:\ type in cd\ncc2 and press ENTER. The prompt should now read C:\ncc2\. Now type nccwn<space>/bypass. Note that <space> represents pressing the Spacebar once. The command line on the screen should appear as follows: C:\ncc2>nccwn/bypass Now press ENTER and the FireFinder screen will come up. Select the OK button to start the program. To exit the Off-Line Mode once you have completed the configuration, log off and restart the computer. The NCC will automatically start to run in "normal" mode. 4--1

70 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual To begin system configuration: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. Figure 4-1 More Commands Window The following window pops up: From the Setup window, click on the System button, or Press the + keys. Figure 4-2 Setup Window 4--2

71 Chapter 4 Configuration The Title window displays as follows: Figure 4-3 NCCG System Settings Window - Title Tab Title Tab The Title window was configured during the initial installation. At this point, the following information can now be changed: System Identification: Enter the name of the installed site, up to 52 characters long. Serial #: The number displayed before the dash is the version of the NCCG software. The number displayed after the dash is the software key serial number. Command Seq #: The number displayed is the number of commands executed since the system was installed. UL System: Select the NFPA 72 mode of operation. Refer to the UL Listed System Type Table, page 2-62, for further information. The possible selections are: NFPA 72 Local - Campus NFPA 72 Local - Highrise NFPA 72 Proprietary Foreign Country Support: Uncheck "Enable Support". Next, click on the Options tab, or press the key. 4--3

72 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The Options window displays as follows: Figure 4-4 NCC System Settings Window - Options Tab with Password Tab Figure 4-5 NCC System Settings Window - Options Tab with Logon Tab Options Tab From the System Settings window, at the Options tab, configure the following: 4--4 Reset Authorization Level: Password level that allows the user to reset the NCC. NOTE: The password level to reset a node is set in the Logon - Security level screen, not here.

73 Chapter 4 Configuration Node Control Authorization Level: Password level that allows the user to connect and/or disconnect a node. Temporary Disable Time in Minutes: Choose the number of minutes (from 1 to 720) that a device or node, disabled by a B level operator, remains disabled. After the allotted time, the device or node automatically reconnects. Default Archive Disk Drive: The default disk drive letter used for an archive of history. This is initially set for the A or floppy drive. It can be set to the CD writer or USB drive if more storage space is desired. Operator Logon Names and Passwords: If selected, this option enables the use of individual operator IDs and passwords. If not selected, only the simple system passwords by level can be used. If this option is not activated, the Passwords tab will display, as shown in Figure 4-4. If this option is activated, the Logon tab will display, as shown in Figure 4-5. Refer to the Logons and Password tabs on pages for more information. History Logging and Reporting: If selected, this option enables the system to store, retrieve, and report long term event history. Time Controlled Events: If selected, this option enables the time events to be edited and used in the system. Logging Printer Connected: If selected, this option enables the local system printer. Expand Macro Command Logging: When this option box is checked, the progress of a macro command is logged on the system printer as each subcommand is activated. The default setting for this parameter is OFF. Inhibit Automatic Configuration Download: When this option box is checked, it inhibits the automatic download of the configuration information from the remote MMBs. Inhibit Generation of Out Events: If selected, the out messages after reset will not appear and will not require acknowledgment. The default setting is OFF. Allow Control From Multiple NCCs: If selected, more than one NCC can have control of the nodes in a system. This bypasses the Request, Grant, Deny. Inhibit Printing of Status Events: If selected, the Status Events will not be printed. The default is set to OFF. Sound System Enabled: Select this option to enable the sound features (refer to page 4-78). Default = unchecked or not enabled. Note: this option will only be available if the proper hardware for sound is installed. Custom Device Names: If selected, this option enables the use of custom device names or pseudonyms for the conventional node:moduledevice format. For example, if device 4:7-5 is a zone in the main lobby, it can be given the custom name Lobby-1. Use Touch Keyboard for Input: If selected, this option automatically pops up the touch keyboard for screens that require input as shown in Figure

74 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Hide Configuration Error Event: When this option box is checked, a change in a panel's configuration that results in it differing from the configuration imported into the NCC is not annunciated as an event. Hide Nim Error Retry Message: When this option box is checked, it inhibits XNET communication retry errors from popping up on the screen in an error message window. Report MXL Device Readings in Volts: This option will cause the chamber, sensitivity and threshold readings from MXL to be reported in the obsolete legacy mode of volts. When unselected, the default, the MXL readings are in percent per foot. Use Device Selection Tree: This option will enable a device selection tree to appear in device selection commands instead of numerical spin buttons. Figure 4-6 Touch Screen Keyboard Next, click on the More tab, or press the key. 4--6

75 Chapter 4 Configuration The More window appears as follows: Figure 4-7 NCC System Settings Window - More Tab More Tab From the NCCG System Settings window, at the More tab, configure the following: Automatic Logout: If selected, this will automatically logout an operator after a preset duration of no operator input. This preset time can be set by minutes in the Automatic Logout time section. Inhibit Multiple Reset Filter: If selected, this option inhibits the filter which prevents panel resets at less than 2.5 minute intervals. The default is OFF (recommended). Enable XNET/MNET NCC: To enable the use of the XNET interface card NCC-2F, or an MNET interface card for use without a NIM in the MXL panel. Default = checked or enabled, so the XNET communication port is active. If no panels or other NCCs are connected to the NCC-2F XNET card in this NCC, for example, for the WAN system, this option should be unchecked. Note: If the state of this option is changed, the NCC should be restarted. Use NRC on XNET: Select if XLS nodes on XNET network are connected via NRC card. Refer to NRC XNET connection in Chapter 2. Style 7 Supervision XNET: To enable/disable Style 7 supervision on an XNET connection to the NCC-2F XNET card. Enable HNET: When this option is checked, the HNET communications port is active. Default = unchecked or disabled. If any WAN Components are installed on the system (refer to the Setup Network section) such as HUB-4, NIC-C, PSC-12, etc., this option should be checked or enabled. Note: If the state of this option is changed, the NCC should be restarted. 4--7

76 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Note: XNET and HNET should be disabled for the NCC Smoke Control application. Style 4 Fiber Optic Connections: Select this option when the Scalance X204-2 fiber optic switches are set for Style 4. When this option is unchecked, the Scalance X204-2 fiber optic switches (if used in the system) are set for Style 7. Multiple NCC Configuration Options Control Vectoring: Select to enable control vectoring where this NCC controls only a part of the network system. Refer to details in Vectoring tab. TCP/IP used for NCC link: When this option is checked, NCC to NCC communications will go through the Ethernet NIC card in the PC using TCP/IP. This option also enables the TCP/IP address entry in the Setup Network map for NCCs. If option is TCP/IP used for NCC link is enabled, additional options become available for configuring two types of remote XNET sub-networks, not directly connected to this NCC: NCC HB on Remote XNET: The remote XNET nodes receive heartbeat from this NCC, so remote XNET nodes on the sub-net connected to another NCC, have supervision for this NCC and its optional XNET subnet, via Ethernet link on NCCs on the common network. Block Remote XNET messages: This NCC isolates messages from remote XNET nodes connected to another NCC, so the XNET nodes on the sub-net connected to this NCC, kept apart on the isolated networks with the NCCs common to each network. NOTE: There are more options available for commissioning/maintenance mode with explanations provided on the help line when the cursor hovered above an option. Inhibit automatic data base exchange: When this option is checked, any changes in one NCC will not be reflected in any other NCC. The data base must be manually updated or transferred using Save and Load of the data base at all NCCs individually. Note: Because the automatic data base exchange feature does not exist at this time, this option should be enabled or checked. Advanced Networking: With this option turned on, advanced networking features are enabled. When this option and the TCP/IP used for the NCC link are both enabled, multiple XNET channels with overlapping addresses and specialized routing can be supported. 4--8

77 Chapter 4 Configuration Next, click on the Display tab, or press the key. The Display window appears as follows: Figure 4-8 NCC System Settings Window - Display Tab Display Tab From the NCCG System Settings window, at the Display tab, configure the following: Newest Event At Top Of List: If selected, the event window displays the most recent acknowledged event at the top of the list. If not selected, new acknowledged events are listed at the bottom of the list. The default setting is unchecked. Enable Graphics Display: When this option is not selected, the graphics window will be closed and covered by the Event List Window. The default setting is checked. Graphics Display Monitor: This option is enabled if graphics are enabled and the computer detects multiple monitors connected. The selector will allow the graphic display to be moved from the first (main) monitor to one of the additional monitors. The main monitor value is 0 which is the default. The second monitor is 1 and the third, if present, is 2. After 4--9

78 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual changing this selection and saving the setup, the NCC must be restarted for the monitor change to take effect. Enable Graphics Browser: If selected, this option allows the browser window to be displayed at the left hand side of the graphics window. Browser Display Monitor: This option is enabled if the browser option is enabled and the computer detects multiple monitors connected. The selector will allow the browser display to be moved from the first (main) monitor to one of the additional monitors. The main monitor value is 0 which is the default. The second monitor is 1 and the third, if present, is 2. After changing this selection and saving the setup, the NCC must be restarted for the monitor change to take effect. Print Multi-line Custom Messages: If selected, this option allows custom messages to display multiple lines. The default setting is unchecked. Display Multi-line Custom Messages: This option allows a long custom message to display as much as possible in the event window. Display Status Events: If selected, this option allows status events to be displayed in the event window. Note: These status events must also be configured individually for each device. (Refer to pages 4-48 and 4-49 for additional information.) Display Node Name: When this option is checked, the event display will change to allow the display of the node name. Refer to Chapter 3 Operator Display showing the Event Window with the Display Node Name Option on. Icon Refresh Limit: This option allows a specified number of icons to be displayed in addition to an activated icon. The default setting for the number of icons to display is 20; the maximum is 100. Maximum Number Of Lines: If "Display Multi-Line Custom Messages" is selected, choose the number of lines to display by clicking on the up and down arrows. A sample display illustrates each of the choices, from one to four lines. The default setting is 1. Next, click on the Color tab. The Color window appears as follows: Figure 4-9 NCC System Settings Window - Color Tab

79 Chapter 4 Configuration Color Tab From the NCCG System Settings window, at the Color tab, the colors of events displayed in the NCCG event window can be configured as follows: Event: Select from Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble, Security or Status events prior to changing the color or accepting the default. Type: Select either "In" or "Out" to further define the type of Event. Change: Click this button to change the color of the selected Event and Type to something other than the default color. The new color is displayed in the sample NCCG Event Window directly above the Change button. Default: Click this button to reset the color of the Event and Type back to the default. Vectoring Tab From the NCCG System Settings window, at the Vectoring tab, the type of events and nodes that can be displayed and controlled by this NCC, are selected. A secondary NCCG using Vectoring has strictly limited control. The operator can acknowledge only visible events. Unless a node has full visibility (identical to having requested full control of the node) the node cannot be fully acknowledged, silenced, or reset. NOTE: This tab is only available in systems with multiple NCCG's in the configuration. In a multiple NCCG system, one of the NCCG's must be configured to view and control all event types, nodes and groups. Figure 4-10 Vector Tab With All Events and Nodes Enabled 4--11

80 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Events This group of check boxes allows for the selection of which event types are visible on this display. The selection All Events is the default for normal operation. Any combination of Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble, Security or Status boxes may be selected on a secondary NCCG. When an event type is chosen for display on this NCC, the top status line will show in a bold white color - the display element corresponding to the selected type. For example, if only Alarm and Status display is selected, then the status bar will resemble Figure Figure 4-11 NCC Status Line - Vectoring Enabled Nodes/Groups This set of selections lists allow for individual nodes and/or node groups, on a secondary NCCG, to be selected for display. If the Selected Nodes and Selected Groups lists are empty, then the NCCG will display all nodes and groups. This is the default. Once any entry is made in either Selected list, then only that node or group will be displayed on the NCCG. To add a node or group to the selection lists, click on the desired item and then click on Add as shown in Figure Figure 4-12 Add Nodes/Groups for Vectoring

81 Chapter 4 Configuration The selections will move from the left list to the right list. Figure 4-13 shows possible configurations of Event and Node/Group Selections. To remove selection from the Selected list, click on an item to choose it and then click on Remove. The selected item will move to the left-hand list. If all items are removed, then full display is restored. For Vectoring Operation, see Chapter 3. Figure 4-13 Selected Nodes and Groups for Vectoring Printers Tab Note: For printer installation instructions, refer to pages 2-56 to Next, click on the Printers tab, or press the key. The Printers window displays as follows: Figure 4-14 NCC System Settings Window - Printers Tab 4--13

82 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual From the NCC System Settings window, at the Printers tab, configure the following: Event Logging Printer: Select the printer port for the event logging printer by clicking on the up and down arrows. Choose the maximum number of columns on the printer. Check Inhibit periodic printer out of paper test if you want the printer to be unsupervised. Emphasis: Press this button to set up color line printing for the Event Logging Printer. (For detailed setup information, refer to pages ) Job Properties: Allows for the setting of Windows printer properties for the logging printer. Note that the paper type must be set to "Fan Fold" if you are using tractor feed paper. Graphics Event Printer: Select one of the default printers from the drop down list. Then click to activate any of the following options: Automatic Print on Alarm: If selected, this option will allow an automatic graphic printout on an alarm event. Automatic Print on Supervisory: If selected, this option will allow an automatic graphic printout on a supervisory event. Automatic Print on Security: If selected, this option will allow an automatic graphic printout on a security event. No Print Borders: This option disables the border around a graphics printout which speeds up ink jet printers. Negative Base Image: If selected, the image will print inverted or negative (black/white reversed). Fit To Page: If selected, this option automatically scales the graphic to fit on the selected page size. Report Printer: Select one of the default printers from the drop-down list. Choose the maximum number of columns on the printer. Check Enable Independent Report Printer Only to print all reports on a separate reports only printer. Note: A font for Report printer should be selected in NCC to match the font selected on the printer settings (set on the printer control panel). Otherwise, the report printout quality cannot be guaranteed. Job Properties: If the same LPT port is used for both the logging and report printers, this option will appear grayed out. If this is not the case, the job properties will be activated allowing for the print job settings to be established. Using the Graphics Printer The More Commands window contains a Print button, as shown in Figure 4-1. Select this button at any time to print the full graphic for the event shown. This must be followed if none of the automatic print options are activated. Each printed graphic will have the same zoom level and icon placement as those currently showing on the screen. Printing is spooled to the hard disk so that multiple prints can be queued up, assuming there is sufficient hard disk space

83 Chapter 4 Configuration When the Print button is activated, a message box appears that indicates Printing in Progress. This box stays on the screen until the image is queued up for the printer spooler. If there is any problem, such as printer off-line, out of paper, wrong port assigned, etc., error message boxes appear. The More Commands window disappears after the Print button is pressed. Graphics Print Format (Refer to Figure 4-15.) The format of the graphics printout is as follows: The current bitmap with all icons showing on the screen is centered and scaled to fit the printer size to the maximum without distorting the image. The title, NCCG Printout, or the NCCG s system name appears in the upper right with the current time and date the print was made. Note that this is the print time and not the event time. Below the image is the event information. This information is the same as the event showing (or selected) on the screen to confirm that the graphic printed is for the right event. The event type (ALARM, TROUBLE, etc.), IN/OUT state, LC/RM acknowledge, the address (node: module-device) appear on line 1. Figure 4-15 Sample Graphic Printout (Shown in Portrait Mode) 4--15

84 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The event s time and date appear on line 2. A custom message appears at the end of this line if it is less than 40 characters in length. If it is greater than 40 characters, it appears on the following lines. The full length message to a maximum of 512 characters appears assuming there is sufficient room available below the graphic. The full page printing area is enclosed in a rectangle unless the No Print Borders option is set. Next, click on the Set Time tab, or press the key. The Set Time window displays as follows: Figure 4-16 NCCG System Settings Window - Set Time Tab Set Time Tab From the NCCG System Settings window, at the Set Time tab, configure the time and date for the whole system by clicking on the up and down arrows. Current - Press this button to update the displayed date and time on the NCCG only to the current date and time. Set - All XLS and MXL panels receive the new time and date at the same time, and their internal clocks are all updated. Note: This is a global command. NCC time can only be set to other NCCs on the network from the NCC with the lowest network address

85 Chapter 4 Configuration Solar Events If any timed events in your system use the Daily Solar activation mode, you must provide special geographical clock and calendar information needed to predict the sun s altitude angle. The Location section of this window is for the latitude and longitude of the installation, in degrees and minutes of arc. Solar events can be timed quite accurately (within one to two minutes) if you specify the installation coordinates to within a few minutes of arc. This information can usually be obtained from a good atlas. See Appendix B for a list of the latitude and longitude for selected cities. If the Operator Logon Names and Passwords option has been selected at the Options tab, click on the Logon tab, or press the key. The Logon window displays as follows: Figure 4-17 NCCG System Settings Window - Logon Tab Logon Tab From the NCCG System Settings window, at the Logon tab, click on the New button to add a user / highlight an existing user and click on the Edit button to modify the information, or press the + keys to add a user / highlight an existing user and press the + keys to modify the information

86 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The Edit a User Logon window displays as follows: Figure 4-18 Edit a User Logon Window Note: The system administrator (logged in at password level D) is the only person who can add or delete a name-password combination or modify the password level. From the Edit a User Logon window, add/modify a user logon and password: Logon: Type a unique identification for the user, between 1 and 20 characters in length, using any combination of uppercase or lowercase alphanumeric characters or symbols on the keyboard. No spaces are allowed. Password: Choose a password that is not obvious to another person. A password may be from 5 to 15 characters in length, using any combination of uppercase or lowercase alphanumeric characters or symbols on the keyboard. Note: Your password is case-sensitive; you must enter it exactly as originally typed, including uppercase and lowercase characters. Full Name: Type the full name of the user. This information appears on user reports. Misc. Information: Type any additional information, up to 32 characters in length (optional). This information appears on user reports. Access Level: When the NCCG operates with the simple password system or the system with user ID and password, there are six access levels. Each higher level can access the functions of the level below it. Some functions can be accessed with no password entered. click on the Update button to save changes / click on the Cancel button to leave the Edit a User Logon window without saving changes, or press the + keys to save changes / press the + keys to leave the Edit a User Logon window without saving changes

87 Chapter 4 Configuration To delete a user logon ID and password, highlight an existing user and click on the Delete button, or highlight an existing user and press the + keys. Note: It is possible to delete or modify your own password so that you lose access to the D password level. If this occurs, call Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. Technical Support at If the Operator Logon Names and Passwords option has not been selected at the Options tab, click on the Passwords tab, or press the key. The Passwords window displays as follows: Figure 4-19 NCCG System Settings Window - Passwords Tab Enter a Simple System Password for each level, choosing passwords that are not obvious to others. A password may be up to 6 characters in length, using any combination of uppercase or lowercase alphanumeric characters or symbols on the keyboard. Note: Passwords are case-sensitive; you must enter them exactly as originally typed, including uppercase and lowercase characters. The commands that each security level can access are programmable in the Security level Tab. Click the Security Level Tab to bring up the following window: 4--19

88 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 4-20 Security Levels Windows - Upper View Note: The Acknowledge check box for level A only silences the local NCC sounder for an event. No events can be acknowledged on the panel and NCC by user level A. Use the scroll bar to scroll down to the lower view of the Security Levels Window: Figure 4-21 Security Levels Windows - Lower View Six security levels are provided for all commands. Level * is the locked console level; Level E is a maintenance level that is only used by factory authorized personnel. Choose the lowest level that should have access to each command by checking the box in front of the appropriate letter. This activates access for the

89 Chapter 4 Configuration chosen security level and automatically activates all higher levels as well. For example, checking on level A for a command will activate levels A, B, C and D for that command, too. The commands on the list are detailed in Chapter 6 - manual operation. The exceptions are as follows; CONTROL - refers to transfer of control for nodes or groups of nodes from NCC to NCC FULL CONTROL - refers to transferring full control of all nodes from NCC to NCC LIST - to print lists on the NCC printer LOG - logs a single line on the printer MONITOR - refers to turning on and off monitoring of a node REBUILD - allows rebuilding of databases click on the Save button to record any changes in security level and exit to the Setup window, or press the + keys to save changes and exit to the Setup window. Note: The Done command exits to the Setup window without saving any system setting changes. When all system setting edits are completed, click on the Save button to save changes and exit to the Setup window, or press the + keys to save changes and exit to the Setup window. Note: The Done command exits to the Setup window without saving any system setting changes. Basic Configuration - Network To begin network configuration: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys

90 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Network button, or Press the + keys. If you are using NCC-GL, go to NCC-GL and MXL (IQ)/XLS Address Setup. If you are using NCC-G or NCCWAN, the following window pops up: Figure 4-22 Network Component Setup Window The network map provides a convenient means of adding, deleting, or editing up to 520 nodes. A scroll bar is provided to allow easy movement to any one of the 520 nodes. Figure 4-23 Network Component Setup Window - Scrolled 4--22

91 Chapter 4 Configuration The maximum node number that can be entered depends on the NCCG package that was purchased. Nodes are added or deleted by using the respective Add or Delete buttons. Nodes are edited by selecting a node and using the Edit button or by double clicking on the node. If the list is large, the search tool below the map can be used to find a node or nodes in a group. Just a few characters is enough for a search. The Find Next button becomes active when any characters are entered. Buttons are arranged on the bottom of the map to allow you to exit (Done), Group (combine nodes into a single icon), and request Help. The WAN Components button is provided to enter and edit the COM-1 cabinet HNET boards, such as HUB-4, NIC-C, PSC-12, etc., that are used on a WAN system. To add a system node, the right side of the network component setup map contains three buttons: Add Panel, Add NCC, and Add VNT. To add a panel, select the Add Panel button. To edit a system node, select the line with the node on the network component setup map and then the Edit button, or double-click with the mouse on that line. The following window pops up: Figure 4-24 Editing Node Window Node #: The node number used to label all events, reports and control. Note that the node assignment was entered during the initial installation of this panel. This information cannot be changed at this point or at a later time. Panel #: The sub-net node number used to identify panels in a global FSI connection. For an XNET node, with the advanced networking option turned off and only one XNET channel, the panel number equals the node number. With the advanced networking option turned on or multiple XNET channels, the panel number is the physical address on the XNET channel for a panel

92 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Node Name: Enter the name used on the node control button. (Refer tosystem Node Status Bar, pages 3-9 and 3-10.) Control Group: If the node is a member of a group, the group name will appear here. Node Type: Select the type of hardware that the NCCG will find at this node. The possible selections are: XL3: Defines the node as an XL3. If selected, enter a custom message for the XL3. MXL: Defines the node as MXL, MXLV or MXL-IQ. If selected, enter a custom message for that MXL/MXLV/MXL-IQ. XLS: Defines the node as FireFinder-XLS. If selected, enter a custom message for that XLS. WAIO: Defines the node as a WAIO system. If selected, enter a custom message for that WAIO. NCC-G: Defines the node as an NCC. If selected, indicate either - This Unit: Assigns this NCC unit to the node. Remote Unit: Assigns a remote NCC unit to the node. Custom Message: Enter a custom message for events that are nodeonly related, such as A/C fail. Default NCCG Control Setting: The primary, secondary, and tertiary settings here show the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd priority NCC address which will assume control of this node on power up. For a single NCC, enter the NCC as the primary in case a second NCC is ever added. Channel Type: This area defines how an MXL, XL3, WAIO or XLS panel is interfaced to the NCC, either in an MXL/XLS network connected via XNET, or connected through a COM-1 cabinet. Note that XLS can only be connected through the MXL/XLS Network (XNET) and XL3 can only be connected through the COM-1 cabinet. Channel: This drop-down list contains all possible XNET channel selections. For an XNET Channel Type panel, the XNET channel that the panel is connected to, should be selected. NOTE: The remote NCC must be assigned here since it was not done during the initial installation. The NCC node with the lowest node number assignment will automatically receive each node s configuration. Nodes assigned to a HUB-4 cannot have their configuration downloaded automatically to the NCC. They must be manually imported. No configuration can be downloaded or imported for XL3. If the automatic download of the CSG-M is inhibited, manually import the CSG-Ms at this point. Refer to section System Data Base Backup and Restore - CSG/ Zeus Import for information about manual download of the CSG-M. If you add a node to the network map after the initial setup is complete, it is recommended to reboot the NCC program after the node has been added

93 Chapter 4 Configuration To reboot the NCC program, press the + keys simultaneously. A dialog box will appear twice asking if you would like to close. Click on the OK button each time. As the computer is rebooting, the FireFinder screen will appear. Click on the OK button to restart the NCC program. NCC-GL and MXL(IQ)/XLS Address Setup If you are using the NCC-GL, the following window pops up: Figure 4-25 NCC-GL and MXL(IQ)/XLS Address Setup The Use NIM Interface should be activated when NCC-GL is connected to the XNET side of an actual NIM-1R. This allows a separate wire connection to the NCC, independent of the MNET. During the initial installation, this configuration information was entered. In this menu you can reassign the node number and node button label for the NCC-GL and MXL(IQ)/XLS. The assignments must be different. In the NCC-GL section, the module number must be provided. This number needs to be the same number assigned in the CSG-M/Zeus. After completing this information, press the save button to save the information. NCCG Node Edit Window Selecting a node and either depressing the edit button or double clicking the node places the operator in the edit window. The node example for an NCCG is shown in Figure 4-26; the node example for an NCCG with the option TCP/IP Used for System Link enabled is shown in Figure

94 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 4-26 NCCG Node Edit Window Figure 4-27 NCCG Node Edit Window with TCP/IP Option

95 Chapter 4 Configuration Node #: The node number used to label all events, reports and control. Note that the node assignment was entered during the initial installation of this panel. This information cannot be changed at this point or at a later time. Panel #: The sub-net node number used to identify panels in a global FSI connection. For an XNET node, the panel number equals the node number and is not editable. For an FSI connection to a single node, the panel number is 1. Node Name: Enter the name used on the node control button. (Refer tosystem Node Status Bar, pages 3-9 and 3-10.) Control Group: If the node is a member of a group, the group name will appear here. Node Type: Select the NCCG: NCC-G: Defines the node as an NCC. If selected, indicate either - This Unit - Assigns this NCC unit to the node. Remote Unit - Assigns a remote NCC unit to the node. Custom Message: Enter a custom message for events that are nodeonly related, such as, A/C fail. Priority of NCCG for attached HNET COM-1: If this is an NCCWAN system an NCCG can be an HNET master, and HNET backup or a passive member. The master controls all of the HNET modules in a normal system. The backup is in hot standby. If the master NCCG fails or if HNET communication is lost between them, the backup will assume control of the HNET modules. A passive NCCG displays and controls the system over XNET or Ethernet using the current HNET controlling NCCG. There can be only one master and one backup NCCG. There can be a master NCCG without a backup. Message from Configuration: For an NCC this will only display No MXL Message Available. Text entered in the edit area below this message will appear in the title bar for the window that appears when the NCC nodes icon is selected. NCC Operating Mode for attached XNET connections: Available selections are: Legacy - setting if no advanced networking Passive - setting if this NCC has no direct XNET network and sees remote XNET networks only. Router - this NCC routes its local XNET traffic a global TCP/IP network. Backup Router - this NCC provides XNET backup routing if the main NCC router is down. Channels Associated with this NCC: this area provides the list of XNET network channels associated with this NCC. It lists the XNET channel number, channel name, channel description, route number, and route name

96 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual TCP/IP Network Address: If the system option TCP/IP Used for NCC Link is selected, this address will appear. The default address is and with this address the NCC will use XNET to communicate NCC to NCC. Any other address and the NCC will steer communications to this NCC over the Ethernet LAN. This address will only appear for NCCs. Setup the TCP/IP Address as follows: For this NCC: Enter the TCP/IP address of the PC. This can be an IP address configured by a DHCP, provided it remains stable. Note: A PCs TCP/IP (or IP) address can be obtained by logging off the NCC, logging on as an administrator and opening a Command Prompt window and typing the command: IPCONFIG. For other NCCs: Enter the TCP/IP address of that NCC s PC. The NCCs at both ends must be set up for communications to exist. Figure 4-28 MXL Node Edit Window MXL Network Connect 4--28

97 Chapter 4 Configuration MXL/XLS Node Edit Window Figure 4-29 MXL Node Edit Window COM-1 Connect Figure 4-28 shows an MXL connected through the MXL/XLS Network or XNET. Figure 4-32 shows an MXL connected through a COM-1 using a HUB-4. Figure 4-30 shows an XL3 connected through COM1 HNET Network. Figures 4-31 shows an XLS connected to the MXL/XLS Network or XNET

98 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 4-30 XL3 Node Edit Window COM-1 Connect Figure 4-31 XLS Node Edit Window on XNET connection

99 Chapter 4 Configuration The following items are editable or viewable on the MXL, XL3, or XLS Node Edit Window: Figure 4-32 Adding A Node Window Figure 4-33 Settings for MXL with CMI

100 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 4-34 MXL with local FSI Figure 4-35 XLS Global FSI 4--32

101 Chapter 4 Configuration Node #: The node number used to label all events, reports and control. Note that the node assignment was entered during the initial installation of this panel in the NCC Network Component Setup. This information cannot be changed at this point or at a later time. Panel #: The sub-net node number used to identify panels in a global FSI connection. The Panel number equals the network address set in CSGM/ Zeus configuration tool. For an XNET node, with the advanced networking option turned off and only one XNET channel, the panel number equals the node number. With the advanced networking option turned on or multiple XNET channels, the panel number is the physical address on the XNET channel for a panel. Node Name: Enter the name used on the node control button. (Refer to System Node Status Bar, pages 3-9 and 3-10.) Control Group: If the node is a member of a group, the group name will appear here. Node Type: Select the type of hardware that the NCCG will find at this node. The possible selections are: XL3 - Defines the node as an XL3. If selected, enter a custom message for the XL3. MXL - Defines the node as MXL, MXLV or MXL-IQ. If selected, enter a custom message for that MXL/MXLV/MXL-IQ. XLS - Defines the node as FireFinder XLS. If selected, enter a custom message for that XLS. WAIO - Defines the node as a WAIO system. If selected, enter a custom message for that WAIO. NCC-G - Defines the node as an NCC. If selected, indicate either This Unit - Assigns this NCC unit to the node. Remote Unit - Assigns a remote NCC unit to the node. Custom Message: Enter a custom message for events that are nodeonly related, such as, A/C fail. Default NCCG Control Setting: The primary, secondary, and tertiary settings here show the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd priority NCC address which will assume control of this node on power up. For a single NCC, enter the NCC as the primary in case a second NCC is ever added. Channel Type: This area defines how an MXL, XL3, WAIO or XLS panel is interfaced to the NCC, either in an MXL/XLS network connected via XNET, or connected through a COM-1 cabinet. Note that XL3 can only be connected through the COM-1 cabinet. Channel: This drop-down list contains all possible XNET channel selections. For an XNET Channel Type panel, the XNET channel that the panel is connected to, should be selected. Hub4 Address: This area shows the HNET address of the HUB-4 that the MXL/XL3 node is connected to. Port will reflect the HUB-4 port number used for this node. Note that all panels (nodes) within a global FSI connection will have the same Hub4 Address. The gateway panel has the Global FSI option set for the communication type

102 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Hub4 Communication Type: This area shows the connection protocol used for interfacing the MXL/XL3 to the NCC system. For an XL3, select CMI-300 (the MMX in an XL3 emulates the CMI-300). For an MXL, choose CMI-300 or FSI. For an XLS, FSI is the only choice. If this node is a gateway to a global FSI sub-network then check Global FSI Gateway. Hub4 Media: CMI-300 communication will force the selection of modem and 300 baud. A WAIO selection forces RS485 and 2400 baud. An FSI connection can be either modem or RS485. The baud rate is selectable and must match the setting of the remote equipment. The recommended default is baud. Lower speeds are used only if there is evidence of compromised communication or poor wire. Higher speeds do not result in a significant improvement because of the polling nature of FSI and inherent delays in the modem formulating transmission packets and overhead at the remote equipment. Port: The settings for the HUB port can be set here. Note that these setting can also be set and viewed in the WAN Components Dialog in the MORE- SETUP - NETWORK - WAN Components. Style: Depending on your system configuration, Style 4 or Style 7 operation is selected. Ground Fault Inhibit: The HUB has the provisions to detect ground faults on the communications channels to the MXL/ XLS/XL3. This check box allows the user the ability to inhibit ground detection based on local operations. It is not uncommon for existing systems to have communication lines grounded and operate properly as ground detection/ annunciation was not available at the time the original system was installed. When new systems are connected to existing wiring, grounds may be annunciated. This is not the fault of the new system, but an indication of a pre-existing condition. Transmit Level: The factory default transmit level is -10 dbm. It is recommended that this setting not be changed unless it is determined that the telco-lines to the MXL/XLS/XL3 are attenuating the signal sufficiently to inhibit proper communication. (Note: By adjusting the level closer to zero, you are increasing the transmitted level; conversely, if an MXL/XLS/ XL3 is close by, you may have to adjust the level lower by using a number further away from 0.) Transmit level ignored when a RS485 interface board is used instead of a modem. Style 7 Sensitivity: Style 7 level sensitivity is provided to change the point at which the circuit fails over to the backup MXL/XLS/XL3 communication channel. Normally, the default setting -23 dbm is sufficient. However, if you have a circuit with a short run and are experiencing troubles, adjust the setting in 5 dbm increments towards 0 dbm. The Style 7 level sensitivity is ignored when a RS485 interface board is used instead of a modem. FSI Poll Delay: This setting causes the selected delay to be inserted between successive polls on the FSI communication link. For an MXL or XLS with a HUB-Slave FSI interface this 4--34

103 Chapter 4 Configuration value is set to zero. For an XLS with an RPM a value of 20ms is recommended due to hardware limitations in the remote equipment. Note, it is recommended that when connecting a large (> 15 nodes) XLS Global FSI system that the HUB-4- Slave FSI be used. Hub4 Communication Fault Address: This is the address is used to report communication faults (Ground Fault, Style 7 Fault), detected by the NCC, to the panel in the remote premises. Module is the address of a pseudo module in an XLS or the MMB (253) in an MXL. Device is the first pseudo device of a consecutive pair. The first address reports Ground Fault the next address reports Style 7 Fault. These pseudo devices must be configured as trouble reporting with a custom message indicating the reported fault in the CSGM/Zeus configuration tool. WAIO Node Edit Window Figure 4-32 shows a WAIO connected through a modem or RS 485. The following items are editable or viewable on the WAIO Node Edit Window: Node #: Node address where the WAIO system appears. NOTE: Node number can be edited only from the "Add A Node" window, not from the "Edit Node" window. Node Name: The name used to identify the node on the node icon and events. Note: This is what will appear in the event if you select system option Node Name. Default NCCG Control Setting: The primary, secondary, and tertiary settings here show the 1 st, 2 nd, and 3 rd priority NCC address which will assume control of this node on power up. For a single NCC, enter the NCC as the primary in case a second NCC is ever added. Location: The WAIO must be connected through COM1 (HNET) only. Address: This area displays the HNET address of the HUB-4 that the WAIO system is connected to. The Port will reflect the HUB-4 port number used for this node.the redundant HUB-4 setting is ignored for a WAIO system. Modem: Choose RS-485. The TCP/IP Network Address field is disabled for XL3, MXL, FireFinder-XLS and WAIO node types and is only applicable for NCCs. NOTE: For an MXL node connected through a HUB-4, automatic CSG-M downloads will not be possible because of the slow baud rate for the connection from the CMI-300. For these nodes the CSG-M files must be manually imported into the NCC using the MORE - SETUP - CSG IMPORT menu selection. Net Hardware Selecting the Net Hardware button on the Network Component Setup (Figure 4-22) will bring up the Configure Network Hardware dialog shown in Figure

104 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 4-36 Configure Network Hardware This dialog presents a list of NCC-2F/XND hardware discovered during NCC startup. The physical COMM port is related to the interface type (XNET_1, HNET_1) and the version of the software running in that hardware. If a newly installed or un-configured NCC-2F is discovered, the Network entry will be blank. To assign or change the network assignment, click on the item to change the then clicking Edit will bring up the Edit Comm Port dialog as shown in Figure Figure 4-37 Edit Comm Port The Network spin button allows for the selection of XNET_1 or HNET_1. Pressing the Set button will program the NCC-2F with the configuration. The Clear button will remove the assignment from the NCC-2F and leave it unconfigured. If you make changes to the port assignments, when exiting the Configure Network Hardware dialog, you are prompted to restart the NCC for the changes to take effect

105 Chapter 4 Configuration Note: The Network Hardware Configuration dialog will appear automatically when the NCC is booted for the first time with un-configured hardware. In this circumstance there will be a Find button that can be used to identify the physical NCC-2F card by blinking the LED on the back panel. The Find button is not available when editing a running system because of hardware limitations. WAN Components Network Map Selecting the WAN Components button on the Network Component Setup (Figure 4-22) will bring up the WAN Components Network Map shown in Figure Figure 4-38 WAN Components Network Map The WAN Components Network Map shows the connection and addressing of the HNET boards and how they are interfaced to this particular NCC. HNET components can be configured as local or remote to the NCCWAN. The most convenient method to determine Local or Remote is if the HNET is routed from the NCC directly to the HUB-4/NIC-C it is local. However, if this NCC is connected to a remote NCC via XNET only and the remote NCC has its own HNET network, then this block is marked Remote. The identity of the board must be defined (PSC-12, PSX-12, HUB-4 or NIC-C) to allow proper supervision by the NCC. Should the WAN System be configured for primary and redundant operation, then a redundant address will be shown for the backup. For a HUB-4, the lowest HNET address for the board will by default become the master (primary) of the two units, and this is the board that will communicate with the panels. For all other boards, the primary and the redundant both assume full operation and the redundant label is used only to reference that the board is providing power or communications to redundant HUB-4s. Do not use the redundant address for NCC Primary and NCC Secondary. Adding WAN Components To add a WAN component to the network map, click the Add button. The Add WAN Component window will appear, as shown in Figure

106 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 4-39 Add WAN Component Window A drop down list box will provide the available choices. The HNET address, local/ remote and the address of the redundant component (if used) must also be selected. Once all selections are completed, clicking the Add button will save the selected component to the WAN network map. The WAN component types available for selection are: PSC-12, NIC-C, HUB-4, PSX-12, NCC Primary, and NCC Secondary. The LED Display item is not available at this time. The PSC-12, NIC-C, and HUB-4 components are editable components and selecting these items and editing or double-clicking on these items will bring up the respective edit windows. Editing WAN Network Map Components Editing a component in the WAN network map will bring up a window that is dependent on the type of component selected. The example shown in Figure 4-40 is for a HUB Figure 4-40 Editing The HUB-4 In The WAN Network Map

107 Chapter 4 Configuration Notice that the Address block in the upper left corner of Figure 4-40 identifies the HUB-4's HNET address. This address must match the address that is set on the three rotary dial switches located on the HUB-4. Just to the right of the Address is a check block marked Remote. Check this block only if this NCC's HNET is not directly connected to the HUB (e.g., this option is for two or more HNETs connected by an XNET or XNET bridge). The Type block identifies the module (HUB-4, PSC-12, PSX-12, etc.) The Redundant Address block is used in systems which require a higher degree of security and operational fail over. By inserting an address here, it identifies the HUB (or other module) which will act as a hot backup to that module which is noted in the address block (see above). Should the primary module fail, the HUB (in this case) will automatically switch to the backup and continue supervising the connected MXL(s). The Status Window identifies what MXL, XLS or XL3's XNET node address is connected to which of the HUB's four ports, as well as the custom message of the control panel. Below the Status Window are four blocked-out areas, which are identified as Port 1 through Port 4. These areas allow the System Technician to change the preset default HUB port values. The factory default transmit level is -10 dbm. It is recommended that this setting not be changed unless it is determined that the telco-lines to the MXL/XL3 or XLS are attenuating the signal sufficiently to inhibit proper communication. (Note: By adjusting the level closer to zero, you are increasing the gain; conversely, if an XLS or MXL/XL3 is close by, you may have to adjust the gain lower by adjusting the level away from 0.) Transmit levels are ignored when a RS485 interface board is used instead of a modem. Depending on your system configuration, Style 4 or Style 7 operation is selected on this screen. The HUB has the provisions to detect ground faults on the communications channels to the XLS, MXL or XL3. This check box allows the user the ability to inhibit ground detection based on local operations. (It is not uncommon for existing systems to have communication lines grounded and operate properly as ground detection/annunciation was not available at the time the original system was installed. When new systems are connected to existing wiring, grounds may be annunciated. This is not the fault of the new system, but an indication of a pre-existing condition.) An NCC reset is required to reflect any change of state of the ground fault inhibit check box. Style 7 level sensitivity is provided to change the point at which the circuit fails over to the backup XLS or MXL/XL3 communication channel. Normally, the default setting -23 dbm is sufficient. However, if you have a circuit with a short run and are experiencing troubles, adjust the setting in 5 dbm increments towards 0 dbm. The Style 7 level sensitivity is ignored when a RS485 interface board is used instead of a modem

108 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The following items can be edited in the WAN Network Map: HNET address Redundant address Type of component Port assignment (Default Transmit and Sensitivity levels should not be changed) Local or Remote Editing a PSC-12 brings up the window shown in Figure The PSC-12's HNET address shown must match the address set on the actual PSC-12. Just to the right of the address is the Remote check box. Check this box if the PSC-12 is not directly connected to this NCC. The Tamper Enabled check box is not used. For UL 1076, refer to the COM-1 Installation section and the instructions for connecting the TSW-2 Tamper Switch. The Battery Size selection is a drop down list box. Select the proper battery size to agree with what is attached to the PSC-12. The Add Relay button is provided to configure the relays on the PSC-12. The relays can be configured as Global Alarm, Global Trouble or General Output. Refer to Figure A relay configured as Global Alarm changes the respective PSC relay state to off normal when there is any alarm on the NCC. When all alarms are cleared on the NCC, the relay state will restore to normal. A relay configured as Global Trouble changes the respective PSC relay state to off normal when there is any trouble on the NCC. When all troubles are cleared on the NCC, the relay state will restore to normal. A relay configured as General Output will change state only through a manual command from the NCC, using either the Device Output Control or using the Disable/Enable (DIS/ENA) and Energize/DeEnergize (ENE/ DEE) manual commands. The address of the relays will be as follows: NCC: PSC module address Relay Number (1 to 4). An example of a PSC address is: 2:8-1 for an NCC at address 2, PSC at address 8, and relay number 1. Figure 4-41 Editing The PSC-12 In The WAN Network Map 4--40

109 Chapter 4 Configuration Editing a NIC-C brings up the window shown in Figure The NIC-C's HNET address shown must match the address set on the NIC-C. Just below the address is the Remote check box. Check this box if the NIC-C is not directly connected to this NCC. Check the Style-4 or Style-7 option to agree with the HNET wiring between the NIC-C and the NCC's NCC-1F/NCC-2F. Figure 4-42 Editing The NIC-C In The WAN Network Map Connection of COM-1 WAN Components To connect to the COM-1 WAN components, the NCCWAN must contain a second NCC-1F (NT) or NCC-2F (XP) card for communication to HNET components. The boards should be set for COM1 and IRQ4 (NT) and COM5 (XP). The only exception to the second NCC-1F or NCC-2F will be when there is either no XNET network or the XNET has been replaced by a LAN connection between NCCWANs. The NCC-1Fs (NT) or NCC-2Fs (XP) will connect to the XNET Network and to the HNET. The HNET connection will be used to communicate with the COM-1modules. With multiple NCCs, all must be connected by either an XNET or a LAN connection. The same holds true for Primary and Seconday NCCs on the HNET network. These NCCs must also be connected on XNET (or a LAN). NCC to NCC communication takes place on the XNET or the LAN connection. NCC to WAN components (COM-1 modules) communication, for both the Primary and the Seconday, takes place on HNET. The system (NCCs) can be configured for primary and secondary operation. One of the two NCCWANs will be configured as the primary of the HNET network. The primary will provide all control and supervision to all HNET connected modules. Should the primary NCC fail or be shut down, the secondary (NCC) will take over the functions of the primary NCCWAN. Failure of both the primary NCC and secondary NCC will cause the COM-1 boards to declare an HNET network supervision trouble. This will cause the HUB- 4s to stop supervising its ports, which, in turn, will cause the fire alarm systems connected to the HUB-4s to report a supervision trouble

110 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Supervision of COM-1 WAN Components The primary NCCWAN will perform all supervision, monitoring and control of the COM-1 based WAN components. It will verify the presence of the PSC-12, NIC-C, HUB-4, PSX-12 and the secondary NCCWAN. Failure of a board to answer three requests will be reported as an NCCWAN in trouble. This trouble will be labeled: XX:YYY:TTT Module Not Responding where: XX = 2 digit node address of the NCC. YYY = 3 digit HNET address of the board or WAN component. TTT = 3 character representation of the board or WAN component type. Sample types: PSC Power supply PSX Power supply extender HUB HUB-4 NIC NIC-C HNET network interface card NCC NCC primary/secondary The out of trouble will report as soon as there is one valid response from the trouble causing WAN component. The NCCWAN will generate troubles pertaining to the HUB-4 ports and to the individual panels connected to the ports. Any failure in node (panel) supervision will cause the NCC to mark the panel's ICON with an X through the node as displayed on the NCC's screen. The following troubles will further specify port troubles. The port troubles will indicate the HUB-4 address and port with an NCCWAN trouble as follows: XX:YYY-ZZZ TTT Trouble Type Node:NNN" where: XX = 2 digit node address of the NCC. YYY = 3 digit HNET address of the board or WAN component. ZZZ = 3 character port number ( ) TTT = 3 character representation of the board or WAN component type. NNN = 1-3 digit node address Trouble Type = one of the following types of troubles: Control Panel Not Responding - The fire alarm panel attached is not communicating and has dropped its modem carrier signal. This is a normal trouble when a panel (and its CMI-300/MMX) has been powered down. This trouble will also correspond with a Carrier Fail LED on a HUB-4 port and with an X through the node icon on the NCC. The TTT board type does not appear for this trouble. Style 7 Failure - The fire alarm panel is still communicating but the HUB-4 has noticed a open or break failure in one of the two pairs used for Style 7. The Open/Short LED on the HUB-4 will light with this trouble. This trouble is also used to report Style 7 failures of WAIO connections

111 Chapter 4 Configuration Ground Fault - The HUB-4 is indicating a ground on a port for the wiring between the CMI-300 and itself. The Gnd Fault LED on the HUB-4 will light with this trouble. This trouble is also used to indicate a ground on a port for the wiring between the WAIOs and the HUB-4. Internal Modem Failure - The HUB-4 is indicating a failure or a missing Modem Block on one of its ports. Module Comm. Failure - The HUB-4 is failing to see valid supervision on a port, either to the panel or internal on the card. Also if an NCC fails to supervise a HUB-4 due to a NCC shutdown or restart, the HUB-4 in turn stops supervising the CMI-300 or MMX, which will cause this trouble. A flashing Open/Short LED on the HUB-4 will light with this trouble. This trouble is also used to indicate a communication failure on a HUB-4 port connected to WAIOs. Unspecified Node Responding - A panel was found connected to a port which was not configured in the NCC network map. The TTT board type and the NNN node number (as no node is assigned) do not appear for this trouble. This trouble is also used to indicate the presence of unconfigured WAIOs on a HUB-4 port. No Response To Command - This trouble is controlled by a system option that allows catching any command that gets no response from a panel. The option is turned off by default and can be turned on at the Maintenance level. The TTT board type does not appear for this trouble. Missing Hourly Op Message - This trouble is also controlled by a system option that allows catching a missing on the hour interface operational message out of a panel. The option is turned off by default and can be turned on at the Maintenance level. The TTT board type does not appear for this trouble. WAIO Supervision: WAIO network problems display as troubles on the assigned HUB-4 port as described above. These troubles include: Style 7 failure, ground fault, module communications fail and unspecified node responding. WAIO module and device troubles display as follows: WNODE:WMODULE-WDEVICE" where: WNODE = network WAIO node address. WMODULE = WAIO module address. (This is the address on the 2 rotary switches on the WAIO.) WDEVICE = address of WAIO inputs (1-4) or the address of WAIO outputs (5-8). The WDEVICE address will not be present if the trouble relates to the WAIO module and not an input or output. WAIO device troubles are: Zone Loop Open - A specified WAIO input has an open in its wiring. Input Disarmed In or Out - A WAIO input (1-4) has been disarmed (in trouble) or re-armed (out of trouble). Output Disarmed In or Out - A WAIO output (5-8) has been disarmed (in trouble) or re-armed (out of trouble)

112 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual WAIO module troubles are: Module Not Responding - The given WAIO configured in the system to be on a HUB-4 port is not present. Device Communications Error - The given WAIO module is having trouble communicating back to the HUB-4. Configuration Error - The given WAIO module has been configured incorrectly. Watchdog Triggered - The given WAIO module had its watchdog timer trigger a restart of the WAIO firmware. Additional non-port related troubles are: Redundant Peer Supv Fail - A HUB-4 is configured to have a redundant HUB-4 and the redundant HUB-4 does not exist or it is not communicating at the proper address. Module ROM Failure - A HUB-4 running internal memory tests has found a failure in its ROM (Flash). Module RAM Failure - A HUB-4 running internal memory tests has found a failure in its RAM. No Battery in PSC-12 - A PSC-12 is configured in the NCC to have a battery and the battery is not present. PSC-12 is on Battery - A PSC-12 has indicated it is running on its battery. Low Voltage Battery - A PSC-12 has indicated that it has a battery whose voltage is low due to failure to take a charge, terminal troubles, etc. Battery Cutoff - A PSC-12 has indicated the battery cutoff switch has fired. Ground fault positive in PSC-12 - A PSC-12 has found a ground fault on its positive output. Ground fault negative in PSC-12 - A PSC-12 has found a ground fault on its negative output. Thermistor Trouble - A PSC-12 has found trouble with an internal thermistor. Tamper Switch Trouble - A PSC-12 has found a supervision trouble with its tamper switch. AC Failure - A PSC-12 has reported the loss of AC. AC Brownout - A PSC-12 has reported low AC levels or brownout conditions. 2A src to backplane shutdown - A PSC-12 has reported the output providing the 2 amp source to the backplane has been shutdown. No 6.2V supplied to backplane - A PSC-12 has reported the output supplying the 6.2V to the backplane has been shutdown. Loop A Failure - A NIC-C set up for Style 7 has found a failure with HNET on its loop A pair between the NIC-C and an NCC NCC-1F/NCC-2F card

113 Chapter 4 Configuration Loop B Failure - A NIC-C set up for Style 7 has found a failure with HNET on its loop B pair between the NIC-C and an NCC NCC-1F/NCC-2F card. Style 7 Failure - A NIC-C is configured for Style 4 and is wired as Style 7. Ground Fault - A NIC-C has reported a ground fault on its HNET wiring between an NCC-1F/NCC-2F card in the NCC and itself. Transfer To Redundant Lock - A HUB-4 with a redundant HUB-4 has transferred to back and forth more than 3 times and will lock in to the current active HUB-4 until the next NCC reset. Note: the inactive or backup HUB-4 will blink its green power LED. WAIO Network Settings Select the WAIO Setting button on the component setup (see Figure 4-22) or right click on a WAIO node and select Edit WAIO Settings from the context menu. This will bring up the WAIO Settings window shown in Figure NOTE: The WAIO Settings button is enabled only if a WAIO node is selected in the nodes list. Figure 4-43 WAIO Settings Window In the WAIO Settings window you can add, edit or delete a WAIO. Select WAIO from the list and click the "Edit" button to display the WAIO Edit window shown in Figure Address: The WAIO address as physically set in the WAIO system. Available addresses are NOTE: WAIO address is only enabled when adding a new WAIO. Name: A name description for the WAIO (optional). Inputs: Number of configured inputs for this WAIO. Outputs: Number of configured outputs for this WAIO

114 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Selecting the Add WAIO button in the WAIO Settings window will bring up the WAIO Editing window shown in Figure Figure 4-44 WAIO Editing Window WAIO Address: Set the address of this WAIO between Name: Set the custom name for this WAIO. Inputs (1-4): Choose the input for each from a pull-down menu (Alarm, Supervisory, Security, Trouble or Status). Non-selected inputs will display "Not Used". Outputs (1-4): Choose the output for each from a pull-down menu (General Usage, Silence, Reset or Acknowledge). Non-selected outputs will display "Not Used". Pulse Width: Choose the output for each: Reset, Silence or Acknowledge - 2 seconds pulsed. General Usage - steady or 2 seconds pulsed. Output Mode: Choose the output mode for each from a pull-down menu (Steady, Pulsed or Continuous). NOTE: Only available for General Usage Outputs. Default: Sets all inputs and outputs to default setting. Fiber Optic Network Configuration - Fiber Optic Switch Fiber Optic Switch (Model Scalance X204-2) must be configured in the NCC Network Components Setup window only if the Fiber Optic Switches require supervision. To begin configuration, the NCCG should be configured with the TCP/IP option enabled (refer to Figure 4-7, System Settings Window - More Tab). To begin configuring these fiber optic switches go to the Network Component Setup window, follow the Basic Configuration Network information as described on page

115 Chapter 4 Configuration Figure 4-45 Network Component Setup - Scalance X204-2 Fiber Optic Switches From the Network Component Setup window, click on the Fiber Optic Switch button.the Fiber Optic Switch List window displays as follows: Figure 4-46 Fiber Optic Switch List The Fiber Optic Switch List window provides a convenient means for adding, deleting, or editing from 1 to 49 Scalance X204-2 fiber optic switches. A scroll bar is provided to allow easy movement to any of these fiber optic switches. Fiber Optic Switches are added or deleted by using the respective Add or Delete buttons. Fiber optic switches are edited by selecting a Scalance X204-2 fiber optic switch and using the Edit button or by double clicking on the fiber optic switch. The column headings in the Fiber Optic Switch List Window are described below: Address: An address ID for the fiber optic switch which ranges from 1 to 49. IP: This is the IP address assigned to the fiber optic switch. Ring Mode: This is either a Master or Client. Only one master exists in a fiber optic ring configuration

116 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Add a Fiber Optic Switch To add a Scalance X204-2 fiber optic switch, click on the Add button from the Fiber Optic Switch List or press Alt + A. The following window will pop up. Figure 4-47 Add a Fiber Optic Switch Address: Assign an Address ID from 1 to 49 to the fiber optic switch. Switch IP: Assign an IP address to the fiber optic switch. Ring Redundant Manager: Select either Master or Client for the fiber optic switch. Only one master exists in a ring configuration. All the others are client. Once done, click on the Add button to add the fiber optic switch to the fiber optic switch list or click Cancel to cancel the changes. Edit a Fiber Optic Switch To edit a Scalance X204-2 fiber optic switch, double click on a fiber optic switch or select the fiber optic switch and click on the Edit button or press Alt + E from the Fiber Optic Switch List. Figure 4-48 Edit a Fiber Optic Switch The Address will be grayed out and cannot be changed, but the Ring Redundant Manager and Switch IP can be modified. Click the Update button to commit the changes or Cancel to undo the change. Delete a Fiber Optic Switch To delete a Scalance X204-2 fiber optic switch, double click on the fiber optic switch or select the fiber optic switch and click on the Delete button on the Fiber Optic Switch List Figure 4-49 Delete a Fiber Optic Switch

117 Chapter 4 Configuration A message box displays in the window to confirm deletion. Click OK to delete the fiber optic switch. Basic Configuration - Smoke Control Please refer to Appendix K in this manual for Smoke Control configuration. Basic Configuration - Device Edit To begin Device Edit configuration: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Device Edit button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 4-50 Device Edit Window - Input Tab 4--49

118 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual INPUT The Input tab of the Device Edit window provides the following selections: Device Name / Standard Device Name: Enter a standard device name in one of the following ways - type in the conventional node: module-device format MXL - NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER: DEVICE NUMBER XLS - The XLS format will be one of the following: NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER^COMPONENT NODE NUMBER:MODULE NUMBER.SUBMODULE NUMBER-DEVICE NUMBER - type in a user assigned name (optional - Only available if Custom Device Names was selected in the NCC-G System Settings Window - Options Tab as described on page 4-5.) - select BROWSE and use the Select a Device to Edit window as shown in Figures 4-51 and Figure 4-51 Select a Device to Edit Window (With Component) 4--50

119 Chapter 4 Configuration Figure 4-51a Select a Device to Edit with Device Selection Tree Enabled (With Component) Figure 4-52 Select a Device to Edit Window (With Sub-Module) 4--51

120 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Custom Device Name: Enter a custom name of up to 11 characters for the MXL and up to 15 characters for the XLS selected device (Only available if Custom Device Names was selected in the NCCG System Settings Window - Options Tab as described on page 4-5.) Custom Input Message: Enter a custom input message of up to 510 characters. This message overrides any existing message from the CSG-M/Zeus. If a CSG-M/Zeus has been imported from a node, the MXL's/XLS's custom message will appear after the MXL: or "XLS:". NOTE: The MXL/XLS message can be copied (CTRL+INS) and pasted (SHIFT+INS) into the full custom message area prior to editing. GRAPHICS This tab, as shown in Figure 4-53, enables the user to assign a device icon and background graphics to the selected device. To Assign an Icon: Figure 4-53 Device Edit Window - Graphics Tab Click on the button. The following window pops up: Figure 4-54 Device Icon Select Window 4--52

121 Chapter 4 Configuration NOTE: The button only appears if there is no device icon assigned. Otherwise, the previously assigned icon appears as the button. Click on the down arrow to select the icon to represent this device and click OK. The available selections are listed below: Ion Detector Flow Switch Valve Monitor Switch Pressure Switch Manual Station Photo Detector Roof Smoke Detector Thermal Detector Under Floor Smoke Detector Air Duct Detector Fire Indicator Panel Command Center Fan Motorized Damper Elevator Purge Activation Fan Override Magnetic Door Holder Security Device Custom icons can be produced using the Icon Editor. Details on the Icon Editor can be found on pages To Assign a Background Graphic: From the Device Edit window - Graphics tab, click on the NEW button, or Press the + keys 4--53

122 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The following window pops up: Figure 4-55 Device Graphic Zoom Level Setup In the Background Image section, the image subdirectory appears. Enter the name of the background image for Zoom level 1 or From the Device Graphic Zoom Level Setup window, click on the FIND button, or Press the + keys The following window pops up: Figure 4-56 Open Window Select the file that contains the background image for Zoom level 1 and click OK. NOTE: Each image previews in the Background Image section of the Device Graphic Zoom Level Setup window as you single click on it

123 Chapter 4 Configuration Click OK in the Device Graphic Zoom Level Setup window. If you select a bitmap image with a file extension of.bmp,.pcx, or.gif, the following window pops up: Figure 4-57 Device Icon Placement Editor - Bitmap Drawing If you select a CAD drawing with a file extension of.dwg,.dxf, or.dwf, the following window pops up (Refer to Appendix G for a summary of supported.dwg,.dxf, and.dwf file formats): Figure 4-58 Device Icon Placement Editor - CAD Drawing This window consists of two panes. The large pane displays the whole background image and the small pane in the upper right corner is a guide that shows where you are in the larger image. This is helpful when using the additional features that allow you to navigate around a CAD background image. (Refer to Figure 4-58): Zoom In / Zoom Out: Click on the magnifier buttons on the toolbar. Panning: Click on the background drawing (not a device icon). Then hold the left mouse button while dragging the background drawing to a new position. Zoom Scale: Next to the 1:1 button on the tool bar, a Zoom Scale spin 4--55

124 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual button allows the editor to select the step size for the next press of zoom in/out. The default value is 0.1 and the maximum value is 2.0. A value of 2.0 will double the effective size when zooming in +. Note that when zooming out from the 1:1 (default) image, any value greater than 0.5 will exceed the limit and be ignored. Figure 4-59 Device Icon Placement Editor - CAD Drawing With Zoom Placing an Icon on a Background Graphic: The selected icon appears in the upper left hand corner of the graphic. Click on this icon, hold the mouse button down and drag the icon into position. Release the mouse button. The icon is now positioned on the background graphic. The address and the device custom message for an icon appear on the bottom of the window when the mouse is placed on the icon and the left mouse button is clicked. To reposition this icon, click on the icon, hold the mouse button down and drag the icon into another position. NOTE: Click on the button to close the screen when icon placement is complete. The icon placement must be saved first. Click on the button in the toolbar to show all previously placed icons. Click on the button to save the image file and icon placement. When changes have been implemented on the icon placement, this button must be pressed to save the change

125 Chapter 4 Configuration Click on the button in the toolbar to Zoom In (CAD drawings only). Click on the button in the toolbar to Zoom Out (CAD drawings only). From the Device Edit window, click on the NEXT or PREVIOUS buttons, or Press the + or + keys to move forward or backward through the list of installed devices. Repeat the process described above until all devices have been assigned icons and placed on all appropriate zoom levels of background graphics. When you have finished, Click on the DONE button, or Press the + keys to exit and return to the Setup window. NOTE: If the graphics browser (page 4-8) is enabled, placing more than five icons (devices) on the same graphic requires an NCC restart. This is necessary to update the browser image view (page 3-3). OPTIONS The Options tab, as shown in Figure 4-60, enables the user to select the style of display for a status point. Figure 4-60 Device Edit - Options Tab 4--57

126 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Standard Device Name: A device address will display active here if the device has been identified as a status in the MXL/MXLV/MXL-IQ's CSG-M or the XLS's Zeus. Display Status Events As: This section allows the user to select the style of the display of the status event. The selection will also delegate the priority of the status event when multiple events are being reported to the NCC. Note: This should be enabled for each status point that is configured (refer to page 4-8.) The choices are as follows: - Not displayed: The status event will not display in the event message window. - Status: The status event will display in a light blue color with a status icon in the event window. - Security: The status event will display in a magenta color with a security icon in the event window. - Supervisory: The status event will display in a blue color with a supervisory icon in the event window. - Alarm: The status event will display in a red color with an alarm icon in the event window. - Trouble: The status event will display in a yellow color with a trouble icon in the event window. Self Restoring: When this option is activated, an IN and OUT pair of events from the same device clears from the event list upon acknowledgment and will not require system reset. This option should not be activated if the system is configured as NFPA 72 Proprietary. Repeat the process described above until all status points have been identified. When you finish, click on the UPDATE button to save your entries. Then click on the DONE button, or repeat the process described above until all devices have been assigned icons and placed on all appropriate zoom levels of background graphics. When you have finished, Click on the DONE button, or Press the + keys to exit and return to the Setup window. Control and Event Customization - Macros A macro is an automated sequence of system commands that executes after pressing a quick combination of keys, rather than selecting each task one at a time using the mouse or the keyboard. Macros simplify time-consuming and often-performed tasks. The number of macro commands that can be stored is dependent on hard drive space

127 Chapter 4 Configuration User-Defined Macro Commands NOTE: There are fixed macro commands that are automatically installed and cannot be edited or deleted. These fixed macro commands are the same as those used in the MXL-VDT and are shown in the Fixed Macro Commands table in Chapter 6. To add, modify or delete user-defined macro commands: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Macros button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 4-61 Macro Manager Window Adding A Macro Click on the New button, or Press the + keys

128 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The following window pops up: Figure 4-62 New Macro Name Window Enter a unique macro name of your choice. A macro name can be a unique letter-number combination, or a predefined name that can be generated by the User dialog or some function key, a SHIFT and function key combination, or an ALT and function key combination. These are listed in the Function Key Assignments section in Chapter 6. The name can consist of up to 20 letter or number characters. If you enter a space it will be replaced with an underscore(_) character. WING 2 for example will become WING_2 and must be used elsewhere in the latter form. The macro name is checked against all existing standard commands and macros. Since the command system allows for abbreviations of commands your new name must not be a duplicate or an abbreviation of any of these existing names. For example neither DIS or DISB cannot be used because it is an abbreviation (minimum of 3 characters) of DISABLE, however, DSB can be used because it differs in the second character. NOTE: In order for user defined macros to appear in the notebook when the USER button is pressed, they must be specifically named - U1 through U88, as described in Chapter 6. To save the new macro name and continue: Click on the Add button, or Press the + keys

129 Chapter 4 Configuration The following window pops up: Figure 4-63 Macro Definition Editor In the Macro Definition Editor window: Macro Name: The new name appears in this window. Password Level: Select the password level for this macro using the up and down arrows. Description: Enter an explanation, up to 40 characters long, of what the macro does. This remark text is displayed on the main console and on the logging printer each time the macro runs. Command Script: Enter the command(s) that performs the action of this macro. You may enter commands with modifiers and arguments. If the script contains more than one command, type a semicolon (;) between each command and the one that follows it. The command script can be up to 1,023 characters in length. (See Appendix F for more information.) To save the new macro definition and continue: Click on the Update button, or Press the + keys. Modifying a Macro Select the name of the macro in the Macro Manager window and click on the Edit button. The Macro Definition Editor window pops up. Modify the information as described in the Adding A Macro section, page Click on the Update button or press the key to save your changes

130 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Deleting a Macro Select the name of the macro in the Macro Manager window and click on the Delete button. The Macro Definition Editor window pops up. Click on the Delete button or press the + key. Printing a List of Macros From the Macro Manager window: Click on the Print button, or Press the + keys. Exiting the Macro Manager From the Macro Manager window: Click on the Done button, or Press the + keys. Control and Event Customization - Holidays Holidays are dates that may be treated in a special way when activating timed events. To define, modify, or list holidays using the Holiday Manager: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Holidays button, or Press the + key 4--62

131 Chapter 4 Configuration The following window pops up: Figure 4-64 Holiday Manager Window Name and Detail: Displays a list (name and description) of any holidays that have already been defined and entered. Holiday Name: Enter a unique holiday name of your choice. The name can be more than one word, and can consist of up to 16 characters (including spaces). Perennial: Select this if the holiday occurs on the same date every year. The system automatically applies this date every year regardless of the year entered in the date field. If not selected, the holiday only applies to the year specified in the date field. Multi-day Holiday: Select if the holiday lasts for more than one day, or if other days (such as an adjacent weekend) are treated as part of the holiday. If not selected, the holiday consists of just one day. NOTE: A Multi-day holiday has two limitations on the dates. First, both dates must belong to the same year (even for the Perennial holidays, for which the date does not otherwise matter). Second, the End Date must come later in the calendar than the Start Date. An example of these limits is that you cannot combine New Year s Eve and New Year s Day into a single Multi-day holiday; they must be defined as two separate holidays. Start Date (MM/DD/YY): Enter the start (or only) date for the holiday. If Multi-day holiday is selected, enter the end date for the holiday also

132 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Printing a List of Holidays From the Holiday Manager window: Click on the Print button, or Press the + keys. Saving Definitions and Exiting the Holiday Manager From the Holiday Manager window: Click on the Done button, or Press the + keys. Control and Event Customization - Events Events are time triggers that can be used to automatically control system parameters such as arming and disarming door monitoring contacts, changing sensitivities, etc. The events can be set to occur any day, all days including and excluding holidays. A comprehensive filter can be set for each event. You must be logged in at password level C and Time Controlled Events must be selected in the NCCG System Settings Window - Options Tab as shown on pages To define, modify, list or delete events using the Event Manager: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + key The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Events button, or Press the + keys 4--64

133 Chapter 4 Configuration The following window pops up: Figure 4-65 Event Manager Window Adding an Event Click on the New button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 4-66 New Event Name Window Enter a unique event name of your choice. The name can consist of up to 20 characters, including spaces (the name can be more than one word). NIGHTMODE is an example of a valid event name. To save the new event name and continue: Click on the Add button, or Press the + keys

134 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The following window pops up: Figure 4-67 Event Definition Editor - Script Tab In the Event Definition Editor - Script Tab window, configure the following: Event Name: The new name appears in this window. Description: Enter an explanation, up to 40 characters long, of what the event is. This remark text is displayed on the main console and on the logging printer each time the event runs. Command Script: Enter the command(s) that performs the action of this event. If the script contains more than one command, type a semicolon (;) between each command and the one that follows it. Refer to Appendix C for basic command scripts and Appendix F for command script guidelines. NOTE: Most NCCG commands cannot be activated as timed events. Presently, the valid commands are DEENERGIZE, ENERGIZE, ENABLE, DISABLE, CONTROL, MONITOR, SILENCE, DEVICE NODE, and LIST. If any other command is entered into a timed event script, an Invalid Command error results when the event comes due. Click on the Settings tab, or Press the key

135 Chapter 4 Configuration The following window pops up: Figure 4-68 Event Definition Editor - Settings Tab In the Event Definition Editor - Settings Tab window configure the following: Activation Mode: Select one of the following choices: Daily The event activates once (at most) each day, at the specified time, including or excepting dates specified in the remainder of this editing process. Daily Solar The event activates not at a specified time, but rather at a specified altitude of the sun. For example, this allows an event to occur every evening at sunset. One Time Only The event takes place just once, at the specified time on the specified date. An event defined with the One Time Only activation mode is deleted automatically after activation at its specified time and date. Daily If you have selected the Daily activation mode, configure the following: Active Days: Select the days of the week for which this timed event is to occur. Holidays: Select from one of the following choices: Ignore The event will occur on the specified days of the week without regard to the exceptional dates (Holidays or Special Dates)

136 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Include The event will occur on the specified days of the week, only if it is an exceptional date. Standard holidays are defined and may be listed by selecting the Holiday button. See Holidays on page Exclude The event will occur on the specified days of the week, except on the exceptional dates. Event Trigger Time: Enter the time of day when this daily event is to occur by clicking on the up or down arrows next to the hour and minute displays. Daily Solar If you have selected the Daily Solar activation mode, configure the following: Active Days: Select the days of the week for which this timed event is to occur. Holidays: Select from one of the following choices: Ignore The event will occur on the specified days of the week without regard to the exceptional dates (Holidays or Special Dates). Include The event will occur on the specified days of the week, plus any exceptional date. Standard holidays are defined and may be listed by selecting the Holiday button. See Holidays on page Exclude The event will occur on the specified days of the week, except on the exceptional dates. Solar Values: If you have selected Daily Solar as the activation mode, enter the following information 1. The solar altitude angle in degrees (can be determined with a protractor) 2. The direction of this angle relative to the horizon (Above Horizon or Below Horizon) 3. The direction of solar motion (Rising or Setting). For example, standard sunrise and sunset occur when the sun is about 1 degree below the horizon, so a sunset event would specify 1 degree below the horizon, setting. A sunrise event would specify 1 degree below the horizon, rising. Standard twilight occurs when the sun is 6 degrees below the horizon, so a sundown event would specify 6 degrees below the horizon, rising. NOTE: Use caution when setting angles far from the horizon. For example, at the latitude of New York City, the sun never gets more than about 73 degrees above the horizon, so an event set to run at 75 degrees would never occur. At this same latitude, an event set to run at 26 degrees above the horizon would run daily for most of the year, but would not run at all for a few days in late December when the sun stays very low in the sky

137 Chapter 4 Configuration One Time Only If you have selected the One Time Only activation mode, configure the following: Time Mode: Select one of the following two choices: Clock If you want to set a particular time of day (such as 15:15, or a quarter past 3 P.M.), use the default Clock time mode. Enter the time and date in the appropriate fields using the format described below for Event Trigger Time. From Now If you wish to have a One Time Only time that is relative to the present time, select From Now. Enter the time (up to 23 hours and 59 minutes) from now until when the event is to occur using the format described below for Event Trigger Time. For example, select From Now and enter 1:45 to cause the event to activate an hour and forty-five minutes from now. Event Trigger Time: Enter the time of day or the number of hours and minutes when this event is to occur by clicking on the up or down arrows next to the hour and minute displays. Event Trigger Date: If you have selected the Clock Time Mode, enter the date when this event is to occur by clicking on the up or down arrows next to the day, month and year displays. To save the new event definition and continue: Click on the Update button, or Press the + keys. Modifying an Event Select the name of the event in the Event Manager window and click on the Edit button. The Event Definition Editor window pops up. Modify the information as described in the Adding An Event section, page Click on the Update button, or Press the + keys to save your changes. Deleting an Event Select the name of the event in the Event Manager window and click on the Delete button. The Event Definition Editor window pops up. Click on the Delete button, or Press the + keys

138 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Printing a List of Events and Definitions From the Event Manager window: Click on the Print button, or Press the + keys. Saving Events and Definitions From the Event Manager window: Click on the Done button, or Press the + keys. Graphic Image Maintenance - Images To begin importing images: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Images button, or Press the + keys, The following window pops up: Figure 4-69 Images Window - Base Tab

139 Chapter 4 Configuration Importing Base Browse and Unprogrammed Event Images The Base Browse Image appears in the graphics window when no other events and their corresponding graphics are displaying. The Unprogrammed Events Image appears in the graphics window as the default image when an event occurs for which there is no specifically assigned graphic. In the Images - Base Tab window: Base Browse Image or Image Use for Unprogrammed Events: Enter the file name of a graphic or Click the Find button to scroll through directories and select an image. NCC Graphics supports.bmp,.pcx,.gif,.dwg,.dwf, or.dxf file formats. (Refer to Appendix G for a summary of supported.dwg,.dwf and.dxf file formats.) The following window appears: Figure 4-70 Graphic Selector Window The Graphic Selector window displays a thumbnail view for each selected filename. Select an image file to open by typing in the location and filename or Click on the Find button, or Press the + keys. The following window appears: Figure 4-71 Select a Graphic Window 4--71

140 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Select an image file to open by choosing: The type of file from Files of Type - <All Files> to list everything in the subdirectory, or other choices to help narrow the search criteria. The letter of the Look in: on which the folder is located. Select a file from the List box, or type an existing file name in the File name box. Click the Open button or Press the + keys to select this file. The filename will then appear in the Images window. Note: To preview an image, double click on the filename and the image will be displayed in the Graphic Selector window. Graphic Display Area Background Color This option should be set to match the background color of the images in your image database. When a graphic image is smaller than the graphic viewing display, this option fills in the viewing space around the graphic image with the selected color. To change the Display Area Background Color, click on the CHANGE button. The following window pops up: Figure 4-72 Change Background Color Selector To match the color in the Current Color box to your image's background, slide each of the color bars (red, green or blue) to the left or right to achieve the appropriate color mixture. The OK button locks in your color combination. The CANCEL button deletes the color combination. Creating and Editing Images Creating An Image Click on the Images tab, or Press the key

141 Chapter 4 Configuration The following window pops up: Figure 4-73 Images Window - Images Tab Images are files on the local computer and can have a title and a description associated with them. Title: The user entered title is used in place of the file name in the images tab of the image browser. Leave the field blank to use the file name. File: The full qualified path name of the graphic file on the local hard disk. Description: The user can enter up to a 120-character description to describe the image. This description is viewable from the images tab of the graphics browser by right clicking on an entry and selecting Properties from the menu. The title and description can be added/changed by clicking on Properties In the Images - Images Tab window: Click on the Create button, or Press the + keys. OR Select a filename from the display list and Click on the Edit button, or Press the + keys

142 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The following window pops up: Figure 4-74 NCCG Graphic Editor For more information on the NCCG Graphic Editor, refer to Chapter 8. Adding and Editing Images To copy an image file from disk or diskette to the database Click on the Add/Copy button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 4-75 Copy File Window Source: Enter the location and name of the file that you want to copy or click the Find button to scroll through directories and select a file. The following window appears: Figure 4-76 Select Source File Window

143 Chapter 4 Configuration Select a source file to copy by choosing: The type of file from List Files of Type - <All Files> to list everything in the subdirectory, or other choices to help narrow the search criteria. The letter of the Drive on which the file is located. The name of the Folders in which the file is located. The name of the File that you wish to open. Click the Network button to select a file from a network drive. The Map Network Drive Window pops up: Figure 4-77 Map Network Drive Window Drive: Click the down arrow to display the first available drive letter for the Network connection. Choose this letter or select another drive letter. Path: Specify the network path for the connection. You can select a previous network path from Path or type in the name of a computer and shared directory. Connect As: To connect using a different user account, enter the account name. Reconnect At Logon: Click to clear this check box if you do not want to connect to the shared directory each time you log on. Expand By Default: Select this option to automatically expand the list in Shared Directories to display the computer in your computer's domain or workgroup. Shared Directories: Shows networks, domains and workgroups, computers and shared directories. Click the OK button to map the network drive or click the Cancel button to return to the previous window without mapping the network drive. Click on the Help button or press the + keys to view a detailed description of the features and tips for the Map Network Drive function

144 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Once you have mapped a network drive and highlighted a source file, click the OK button to select this file. The filename then appears in the Copy File window. Destination: Enter the location and complete filename (name.extension) for the destination or click the Find button to scroll through directories and select a file. The following window appears: Figure 4-78 Select Destination Window Select a destination file to copy to by choosing: The type of file from List Files of Type - <All Files> to list everything in the subdirectory, or other choices to help narrow the search criteria. The directory from the Save In location where the file will be located. The name of the File that you wish to copy to from the Object Name field. Click the OK button to select this file. The filename will then appear in the Copy File window. To begin copying an image file from disk, USB or diskette to the database Click on the Copy button. When the progress bar at the bottom of the Copy File window reaches 100%, Click on the Done button to return to the Images Tab of the Images window. Importing Images Data from the MXL-G machine must be resident in an NCCG machine before files can be imported. First, create a subdirectory in Windows and copy the *.XLG (screens) and *.DAT (database) files into that subdirectory. Refer to Exiting NCC to the Windows Desktop on page (It is likely that all these files together will be larger than 1.44 MB and will not fit on a floppy disk.) To begin importing existing MXL-G\CXL-G graphic databases: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or 4--76

145 Chapter 4 Configuration Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Images button, or Press the + keys. Click on the Images tab, then click on the Import button. The following window pops up: Figure 4-79 Import XL-G Graphic Data Base Window In the Import XL-G Graphic Data Base window: XL-G Data File Location: Enter the file name of an XL-G Data File or Click on the Select button, or Press the + keys

146 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual A window similar to the following window appears: Figure 4-80 XL-G File Selection Window Select an XL-G file to import by choosing: The List files of type - <All Files> to list everything in the subdirectory, or other choices to help narrow the search criteria. The letter of the Drive on which the file is located. The name of the Folder in which the file is located. The name of the File that you wish to open. Click the OK button to select this file. The filename will then appear in the Import XL-G Graphic Data Base window. NOTE: You only need to select one of the *.dat (database) files. The NCC- G will assume all the database files are in that directory during the import process. Complete the importing process by selecting the following: Target Image File Type: Select the appropriate file type PCX - PC Paint (default - recommended) BMP - Bitmap GIF - Compuserve TGA - Targa (Additional supported file types are shown in Figure 4-64.) Source Data Base Type: Select the appropriate type CXL-G Data Base MXL-G Data Base If MXL-G Data Base is selected, choose the correct XLG Import Node by clicking on the up and down arrows. Over Write Existing Data Base: Select this option by clicking on the box if you wish to copy the new data base information over the existing information. To begin importing the new data base: Click on the Begin Import button

147 Chapter 4 Configuration Two things happen - 1. The graphics files convert from *.xlg format to the chosen format (the default is *.pcx). 2. An XL-G or CXL-G database imports and is inserted into the NCC-G standard database. Processed Images - As files are imported, filenames of processed images scroll past in this window. Missing Images - As files are imported, filenames of missing images appear in this window. NOTE: Files showing in the Missing Images window should be recopied into the import directory. The import procedure should then be repeated. To exit the Import XL-G Graphic Data Base without saving selections - From the Images window: Click on the Exit button, or Press the + keys. Graphic Image Maintenance Rebuilding The Database If the database needs repair Click on the Rebuild button The following window pops up: Figure 4-81 Image Data Base Rebuild Window Click on the Start button, or Press the + keys

148 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The following message appears in the window: Figure 4-82 Please Wait! Window When the database has been rebuilt, the following message appears in the window: Figure 4-83 Completed! Window Click on the Done button, or Press the + keys to return to the Images window. Image and Device Relationship Report From The Setup Window, click on the Image button, or Press the + keys (Refer to Figure 4-84)

149 Chapter 4 Configuration Figure 4-84 Setup Window - Images Button Click on the Image tab, then Click on the Report button or Press the + keys (Refer to Figure 4-85). Figure 4-85 Images Window - Report Button 4--81

150 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Next, select the Report Type and the Report Detail options. This report outlines which devices have been programmed in the NCCG and which have not. This report can run on criteria such as programmed versus nonprogrammed, and zoom level. Zoom Level 1 creates a shorter report for a quick review. This report may print to the report printer. Note: This report might take few minutes or more to run, depending upon the size of the database. To view the report on the screen, click the View button. Note: All buttons are disabled while the report is being generated. Figure 4-86 Report Type and Report Detail Selection The report is displayed in the window as show in Figure Figure 4-87 Image and Device Relationship Report 4--82

151 Chapter 4 Configuration When you have finished viewing the report, click on the Done button. To view additional reports, repeat the process and change the report type and/or report detail option for each new report. Saving Selections and Exiting the Images Window From the Images window: Click on the Save button. Exiting the Images Window without Saving Selections From the Images window: Click on the Done button. Icon Editor The icon editor is used to add icons to the NCC-G. These newly added icons are in addition to the standard set of icons supplied with the system. From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up (see figure below). Figure 4-88 Selecting The Icons Button 4--83

152 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual From the Setup window, click on the Icons button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 4-89 Icon Edit Initial Screen The icon edit initial screen (See Figure 4-89) shows the existing icons arranged alphabetically in a list box. A vertical scroll bar appears on the right hand side of the list box to scroll to icons that are not seen initially due to space limitations. Below the list box, a text description of each icon appears for the icon selected in the text box. The image for the selected icon should appear in the upper right portion of the screen. The Edit button is used to edit an existing icon. However, the NCCG supplied set of standard icons cannot be edited. This is why the Edit button appears grayed out if any of the standard icons are selected. The Create button is used to create a new icon. The Delete button is used to delete an existing icon. The standard set of icons cannot be deleted. The Done button is used to exit this window and return to the Setup window

153 Chapter 4 Configuration To create a new icon, click on the CREATE button. This brings up the following window: Figure 4-90 Create a New Icon Window The New Icon window contains edit boxes for a Reference, File Name, and Description. The Reference is the name that the icon editor shows in the list box referring to the icon. The File Name that appears is a default file name that is guaranteed to be unique. However, this can be edited to any file name that isn t already used. Note that all icons have a.bmp extension. Also, no spaces should be used when creating a filename. The Description is the text note that appears in the Description box in the icon edit initial screen. NOTE: All of the above information must be provided in order for the icon to properly appear in the icon reference window. Figure 4-91 Creating a New Icon 4--85

154 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 4-91 is an example of adding an icon for a Heat Detector - Rate of Rise. The Reference and Description boxes have been filled out. The File Name was changed from the default file name IC9U0JQM.BMP (Refer to Figure 4-90) to HEATROR.BMP, a recognizable name. The default file name could have been used, but using a name that assists in understanding what a bitmap file contains is more helpful. The case of characters entered is not important. The Find button is provided for looking at the existing file names and other drives and directories, if desired. The Copy button allows the user to create a new icon from an existing icon instead of having to start from scratch. Using the Copy button brings up the Copy File dialog box, as shown in Figure Enter the source file name to be copied and the destination file name or use the Find buttons to select the file source or destinations desired. Once the desired source and destination are selected, press the Copy button. As the copy is being generated, the bar graph shows the progress with 100% indicating the file has been successfully copied. Figure 4-92 Copy File Dialog Box Figure 4-93 shows the Copy File entries for a rate of rise heat detector. In this example, the bitmap HEATROR.BMP was created from the existing bitmap file ROOF.BMP. The bar graph indicates the transfer was 100% complete. The Done button brings the user back to the New Icon window (Refer to Figure 4-90). Figure 4-93 Using the Copy File 4--86

155 Chapter 4 Configuration The Draw Icon button in the New Icon window starts the graphic icon editor with a blank icon. The Cancel button provides a pullout exit. If Edit had been chosen for the existing icon shown in Figure 4-89, then the dialog box shown in Figure 4-94 would appear. Notice the dialog box is titled Edit Icon or Description. Only the description field of this dialog box can be edited. To change the file name assignment of an icon, the icon must be deleted and a new icon created with a new file name. When the Draw Icon button is selected, the current bitmap file opens in the Icon Editor screen. Figure 4-94 Edit Icon or Description Window The size of all icons is 32 x 32 pixels. The default background color is pink. We recommend using pink as the background color because it is interpreted as transparent when used on an image. Being transparent allows the drawing the icon is placed on to show through. The actual size of the icon is shown above the editing area. Editing is performed by clicking the mouse (left mouse button) on a color and moving the mouse to a location on the image and clicking where you wish to paint that color. Each block represents a pixel on the image. Multiple pixels can be painted by holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. Select pink to erase erroneously painted locations

156 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 4-95 Icon Editor The Icon Editor has the following menu commands to assist in editing the icons: File, Edit, View, Image, Options, and Help The File menu allows the user to start new bitmap data, open other existing bitmaps, or save a file. Do not use the Save As function because there is no link to the icon in this mode. If you wish to change a file name, make the change in the new icon screen. The Edit menu is useful for cutting, copying, and pasting parts of the bitmap, especially if any pattern is to be repeated. The select all item selects the entire image. To select part of an image, draw a marquis box around the desired area using either of the first 2 tools on the top of the tool bar. Use the undo item to undo the last keystroke. The View menu allows the user to change the magnification of the image. This can also be changed by using the magnifying lens on the tool bar to toggle from the small view to the large view. A grid display which clearly shows the pixels in the bitmap can be displayed after selecting the custom size option by pressing the + keys. The Image menu allows the user to flip/rotate and stretch/skew the entire image. It is also possible to invert colors, change attributes, or clear the image. It is recommended that these settings not be changed. Use the tools in this menu with caution, being sure not to change the size of the icon from 32 x 32 pixels and the background color from pink. The Options menu allows the user to change colors and create additional colors. The edit color selection allows for the creation of a new color instead of the currently selected color by using variable amounts of Red, Green, and Blue (RGB). Note that the color pink used as transparent is made from the following setting: Red = 255, Blue = 255, Green = 0. Any variance from these values will not be transparent. The draw transparent selection in the pull down menu is not functional.

157 Chapter 4 Configuration Use the File menu to save a file when editing is done. Then exit the Icon Editor by clicking on the (close box) in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. This brings up the Edit Icon or Description window (see Figure 4-96). Click the UPDATE button to update the icon information in the data base. Figure 4-96 Edit Icon Or Description Window Confirm the icon is correct by selecting this new icon in the Icon Edit Screen (Figure 4-97). Check that the icon that appears is the icon you have just created. Figure 4-97 Checking the Icon Edit Screen The new icon now appears in the Device Edit Icon list and can be assigned to a device. Refer to pages in this Chapter for further information

158 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual System Sounds Systems sounds are the sounds generated by the speaker on the NCC computer in response to the occurrence of different events. The volume of the sounds can either be all adjusted simultaneously or the sound for individual events can be given different volume levels to make them stand out from each other. From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Sounds button, or Press the + keys. Note: Before the system sounds can be configured, you must enable this feature in the NCC System Settings Window - Options Tab (refer to page 4-5). The following window pops up: Figure 4-98 Master Sound Level Control To adjust the level of ALL sounds at the same time, either click the - and + buttons or click and hold the dial while moving your pointer arrow around to the left (less volume) or right (more volume). NOTE: The local speaker cannot be turned off. If the NCC computer has stereo speakers connected to it, the balance knob is used to adjust how the sound is split between the two speakers. Clicking on the - button increases the sound from the left speaker (lower numbers). Clicking on the + button increases the sound from the right speaker (higher numbers). The same effect can be obtained by clicking on the dial and holding the mouse button down. Turning the dial to the left increases the sound from the left speaker and turning the dial to the right increases the sound from the right speaker

159 Chapter 4 Configuration To modify individual sounds, click the System Sounds tab. The following window pops up: Figure 4-99 System Sounds Tab In this NCC version, you can assign sounds to seven pre-determined events: Alarm Events Security Events Supervisory Events Trouble Events Trouble Events Still Unacknowledged Trouble Events Ignored System Ready Select an event that you wish to modify and click the EDIT button. The following window pops up: Figure Individual Sound Edit Window 4--91

160 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Browse - Click this button to look for a sound (a *.wav file) that you want to assign to this event. Test - Click this button to play the sound (*.wav file) that currently shows in the window. Stop - Click this button to stop playing the sound (*.wav file) that you were testing. Pause Time - Choose the internal (in milliseconds) between the repeats of the sound (*.wav file). Repeats - Choose the number of times that the sound (*.wav file) will play in succession. Note: 0 = Infinity and any positive non-zero number limits the number of time that the sound (*.wav file) repeats. Volume - Adjust the level of the sound, either by clicking the - and + buttons or by clicking and holding the dial while moving your pointer arrow around to the left (less volume) or right (more volume). System Data Base Backup and Restore - Save NCCG configuration and database can be saved on CD (CD +-R, CD-RW+, CD+- RW), a USB external drive, or diskette. NOTE: We recommend that you make a backup after any major modifications to the system data. Saving The NCC Data Base To A CD To begin saving NCCG configuration data to a CD: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Save button, or Press the + keys

161 Chapter 4 Configuration The following window pops up: Figure Save System Files To CD Options - In order for the backup to include the graphic image database, you must check the Backup/Restore All Source Images option. - In order for the backup to include the diagnostic event files, you must check the Backup/Restore All Diagnostic Event Files option. CD-RW Control - Eject CD - Click this button to eject the CD from the NCC computer. - Erase CD - Click this button to erase the existing content of the CD. Target Drive - Specifiy the drive letter which corresponds to the CD-ROM drive

162 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Click on the Start button, or Press the + keys to initiate the saving process. The CD/DVD Writer: Getting Media Information window will display: Figure CD/DVD Writer: Getting Media Information Click the Edit button and insert a CD into the appropriate drive. The software will detect the type and size of the media. If the disk is blank, "Media Blank" displays in yellow. If the disk is not blank, "Media Not Blank" displays in yellow and the View Media button is shown. Click the View Media button to display the contents of the target media in the following window: Figure Browse For Folder: Media Not Blank Press OK when finished viewing the contents of the CD to close the Browse For Folder Window. Then, press Continue to proceed with the backup process. NOTE: Existing disk content will be erased in this case. (To change the disk with another one, press the Eject button.) The NCC files will also be compressed. The progress of this compression will be displayed in the Save System Files Window. The progress bars during backup illustrate the % Total Complete, % File Complete and % Disk Used. This process may be interrupted by clicking the Abandon button

163 Chapter 4 Configuration Figure Viewing Back Up To CD Progress When the data compression process is complete, the following window displays: Figure CD/DVD Writer: Initializing Press Record button on the CD/DVD Writer window to begin disk recording. NOTE: Until the Record button is pressed, you can still change the media by pressing Eject. The content of the disc cannot be viewed after Record button is pressed to write to a disk

164 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure CD/DVD Writer: Recording Press the Abort button if the recording needs to be terminated. However, the media will not be usable anymore. When backup is complete, the window Save System to Drive D will pop up and the disk will be ejected automatically. The progress graphic after backup illustrates 100% Total Complete, 100% File Complete and % of Disk Used. The following signifies that back up is complete: The notation Move all backup images to lastbackup appears in the list of backed up files Done button becomes available. Figure Save System To Drive - Complete 4--96

165 Chapter 4 Configuration Saving The NCC Data Base To A Floppy Disk (Diskette) To begin saving NCCG configuration data to a Floppy Disk: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Save button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure Save System Files Drive A: 4--97

166 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Options - Erase Only (No Format): Check this option to prevent formatting of a floppy disk. - Backup/Restore All Source Images: Check this option to include the graphic image database. - Backup/Restore All Diagnostic Event Files: Check this option to include the diagnostic event files. Target Drive - Specifiy the drive letter which corresponds to the floppy disk drive. Click on the Start button, or Press the + keys to initiate the saving process. One of two Prepare Media windows displays depending upon whether or not the Erase Only (No Format) option was checked. Refer to Figures 4-109a and 4-109b. Figure 4-109a Figure 4-109b Prepare Media - Erase Only Prepare Media - Format The Full Format check box may be selected to format the floppy before backing up. Then click OK. If the diskette contains files, the system will display a Browse for Folder window with the contents of the diskette. To overwrite the contents of the diskette press OK in the Browse for Folder window

167 Chapter 4 Configuration Figure Browse For Folder: Diskette Not Blank The backup process erases all the original contents of a diskette, then proceeds to backup. Press Cancel in the Browse for Folder window to return to the previous window if you wish to switch to another diskette first. Press OK to proceed with the running of backup process. The disk will either be erased or formatted first, then the NCC files will also be compressed. The progress of this compression will be displayed in the Save System Files Window. The progress bars during backup illustrate the % Total Complete, % File Complete and % Disk Used. This process may be interrupted by clicking the Abandon button. Figure Viewing Back Up To Diskette Progress 4--99

168 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The progress graphic during backup illustrates the % Total Complete, % File Complete and % Disk Used. When the first diskette is full, you will be prompted for a new diskette. The entire process usually requires at least three floppy diskettes or many more if Images and Diagnostic Files are included. Figure Insert Next Diskette All the following signifies that back up is complete: The Abandon button changes to Done (the Done button becomes available) The notation Move all backup images to lastbackup appears in the list of backed up files. Press Done button at the Save System to Drive A and press OK at the Media Change notification message. Figure Media Change Notification Saving The NCC Data Base To An External USB An NCC database and configuration can be saved on an external USB drive. The USB media has to be inserted first, so the USB drive has initialized and has been recognized by the NCC computer. The user can create folders on the USB device for backing up the database. To begin saving NCCG configuration data to an external USB: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys

169 Chapter 4 Configuration The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Save button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure Save System Files To An External USB Options - In order for the backup to include the graphic image database, you must check the Backup/Restore All Source Images option. - In order for the backup to include the diagnostic event files, you must check the Backup/Restore All Diagnostic Event Files option. Target Drive - Specifiy the drive letter which corresponds to the USB drive. Click on the Start button, or Press the + keys to initiate the saving process

170 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure Prepare Media Window - USB Device A Prepare Media window displays (refer to Figure 4-115). Click the Browse button to select a folder in which to save the database on the USB media. The Browse For Folder window displays (refer to Figure 4-116). To create a new folder, click the Make New Folder button, enter the name of the folder and click OK. This returns you to the Prepare Media window which now displays the new folder name (refer to Figure 4-117). Figure Prepare Media Window - USB Device Figure Prepare Media Window Displaying New Folder - USB Device

171 Chapter 4 Configuration Click OK to continue. The NCC files will also be compressed. The progress of this compression will be displayed in the Save System Files Window. The progress bars during backup illustrate the % Total Complete, % File Complete and % Disk Used. This process may be interrupted by clicking the Abandon button. All the following signifies that back up is complete: The Abandon button changes to Done (the Done button becomes available) The notation Move all backup images to lastbackup appears in the list of backed up files. Figure Save System To USB - Complete Press the Done button at Save System to Drive E. Then press OK at the Media Change message to unmount the USB drive. The USB drive will be closed and it is safe to unplug the USB media

172 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual System Data Base Backup and Restore - Load A saved NCC backup database can be restored and loaded to the same or another NCC from CD, USB external drive, or floppy disk. To begin restoring NCCG configuration data from backup media created using the Save command: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Load button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure Load System From Drive

173 Chapter 4 Configuration Options - To restore the graphic images, you must check the Backup/Restore All Source Images option. - To restore the diagnostic event files (*.evt), you must check the Backup/Restore All Diagnostic Event Files option. Target Drive - Specifiy the source drive. Follow the prompt to Insert CD (or other media) which contain the saved NCC backup files into the appropriate drive and press OK. Click on the Start button, or Press the + keys to initiate the restore process Figure Load System From Drive - Insert CD NOTE: Do not operate the system until a full set of files has been successfully restored

174 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Follow the on screen instructions to continue the database load process. When the reload of the backup files is complete, a message prompting restart of the NCC will be displayed: Figure Load Complete Press OK to restart NCC computer for the reload operation to be completed. The NCC computer will restart automatically based on the selection in the Load Complete window. After the NCC has restarted, the NCC Backup Manager appears on the screen with the date of the backup from the source media. Figure NCC Backup Manager Click Abandon Operation to discard the files read during this restore session. The NCC will continue to boot using the existing configuration. Click Continue Restore for the files from the current backup to be restored. NOTE: This will also save the current NCC configuration to subdirectory Last Restore in NCC installation folder

175 Chapter 4 Configuration Click Continue Restore and the following window appears on the NCC computer screen: Figure Register Backup Files - Start Select Extract All Diagnostic Event Files to restore all diagnostic event files from the backup. Click Start to begin registering all backup files. The progress bar during backup illustrates the % Total Complete. Figure Register Backup Files - In Process

176 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual All the following signifies that back up is complete: The Done button becomes available The notation Moving backup source to lastbackup. Restore Operation Complete appears in the end of the list of restored files. Figure Register Backup Files - Complete Press the Done button at Register Backup Files to exit the registering operation. NOTE: The warning message WARNING: Errors ignored on restore:1 is expected and does not indicate a failure to restore properly. Press the Done button at the NCC Backup Manager window to complete the restore process. Figure NCC Backup Manager - Complete

177 Chapter 4 Configuration Note: The enable and disable status of the system, at time of backup, will also be restored. We advise you to reset the system and obtain a list of disabled devices (See the RESet Command, Chapter 6). System Data Base Backup and Restore - CSG/Zeus Import To begin Importing a CSG-M configuration file from diskette: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the CSG/Zeus Import button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure Import a CSG-M/Zeus Configuration Window

178 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Node: Select the node that corresponds to the configuration. Import All: Select this option to load all configuration information at once. Configuration: Enter the configuration name or use the default provided. Source: Select the source drive where the configuration is contained. Browse: Select the folder and filename desired Insert the diskette containing the CSG-M or Zeus configuration file into the A: drive. Click on the Import button, or Press the + keys to begin importing the CSG-M or Zeus configuration files. Exiting without Saving From the Import a CSG-M/Zeus Configuration window: Click on the Done button, or Press the + keys. Changing a Device State To query or change the state of a device: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Device button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure Change a Device State Window (With Component)

179 Chapter 4 Configuration Figure 128a Change a Device State with Device Selection Tree Enabled Figure 128b Change a Device State Output with Selection Tree Enabled Node: Select the address number of the node (between 1-255) in which the device is located by clicking the small up and down arrows. (The large up and down arrows jump to the next or previous node in the database.) With the NCC-GL, the arrows will allow the user to go past the node capacity, however no text will appear. The NCC-GL will not recognize any node count beyond 2. Module: Select the address number of the module (between 1-254) in which the device is located by clicking the up and down arrows. (The small arrows move through all the numbers between in chronological order. The large arrows move through numbers representing installed modules in chronological order.)

180 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure Change a Device State Window (With Sub-Module) Device: Select the address number of the device (between 1-254) by clicking the up and down arrows. (The small arrows move through all the numbers between 1 and 254 in chronological order. The large arrows move through numbers representing installed devices in chronological order.) Component: Select the address number of the component (between 1-7) by clicking the up and down arrows. (The small arrows move through all the numbers between 1 and 7 in chronological order. The large arrows move through numbers representing installed components in chronological order.) The sub-module checkbox should be unchecked to select a component. Refer to Figure Sub-Module: Select the address number of the sub-module (between 1-127) by clicking the up and down arrows. (The small arrows move through all the numbers between in chronological order. The large arrows move through numbers representing installed components in chronological order.) The sub-module checkbox should be checked to select a component. Note: When you select Sub-Module, the device range will be between (Refer to Figure ) Input Control: Choose one of the following - - Enable Input - Disable Input - No Change Output Control: Choose one of the following - - Enable Output - Disable Output If disabled (disarmed), select one of the following - Energize (on) De-Energize (off) No Change - No Change

181 Chapter 4 Configuration Then, click on one of the following buttons: Do and Exit: Sends the changes to the device and exits this window. Do It: Sends the selected changes to the device, but does not exit this window. Exit: Exits this window without sending a system command. Help: Displays a windows Help window with a description of device control

182 Chapter 5 Operation 5 Operation Logging On To log onto the system from the main operator display, click on the LOG ON button in the vertical button array on the right side of the screen, or Press the key. One of three message will be displayed: Enter Password window (For Password Only) (Refer to Figure 5-1) Enter Password window (For User Logon and Password) (Refer to Figure 5-2) Touch screen keyboard, as shown in Figure 4-6 on page 4-6. Enter the appropriate information. click on the Ok button, or Press the + keys. If your name and password are correct, the system will grant you access at your assigned security level, it will display the level on the status line. If your name and password are not correct, the system denies you access and you must log on again. Refer to pages for more information about security levels. Figure 5-1 Enter Password window - Password Only Figure 5-2 Enter Password window - Logon and Password Click on the Info button to open the Product Information Window with an Installation ID and Product Code (refer to Figure 5-3). Figure 5-3 Product Information Window 5-1

183 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Logging Off To log off the system from the main operator display, click on the LOG ON button in the vertical button array on the right side of the screen, or Press the key. One of three messasges will be displayed: Enter Password window (For Password Only) (Refer to Figure 5-1) Enter Password window (For Logon and Password) (Refer to Figure 5-2) Touch screen keyboard, as shown in Figure 4-6 on page 4-6. Type in your logon name (if required) and password. click on the LOGOUT button, or Press the + keys. Acknowledging Events and Audibles ACK When there are active events, the ACK button on the top right of the screen flashes to indicate that an acknowledgment is required (See Figure 5-4). The button operates differently depending on the configuration of the system as explained below: NFPA 72 Local - Highrise. The ACK button label changes to indicate the highest priority event queue. 1st Priority: ALARM (displayed in red) 2nd Priority: SUPERVISORY (displayed in blue) 3rd Priority: SECURITY (displayed in magenta) 4th Priority: TROUBLE (displayed in yellow) For example, if there are alarms active, the label on the button will turn bright red and display ALR-ACK. When the button is pressed all existing unacknowledged alarms are acknowledged at once and the name of the next highest queue is shown in the ACK button. The acknowledgment takes place at the NCCG, the local MXL and the XLS which caused the event. Figure 5-4 Button Array 5-2

184 Chapter 5 Operation NOTE: The acknowledgment is displayed on the NCCG s Monitor in the alarm list window as well as on the connected logging printer. NFPA 72 Local - Campus. The ACK button silences only the audible signal from the NCCG and only has display capabilities. Functions not allowed under this configuration are displayed as lightly colored buttons. If any of the events in the display queue were generated by the NCCG (such as, NCCG configuration errors, printer errors, etc.), then they may be acknowledged by the appropriate command. NFPA 72 Proprietary. The ACK button causes only the most recent unacknowledged event in the event queue to be acknowledged and each event must be individually acknowledged. You may also press the key to acknowledge an event. NOTE: NFPA configurations do not apply to the NCC-GL. NCC-GL does not support (XNET) network. SILENCE The SILENCE button, located just below the ACK button, or the key changes the state of the selected MXL and/or XLS system s silenceable audible devices and toggles between SILENCE and UNSILENCE (See Figure 5-4). NOTE: This command has no effect in a NFPA 72 Local - Campus system. RESET The RESET button or the key is used to reset the system when all events are acknowledged, all audible devices are silenced and all queue information is printed. It causes the whole system to reset just as if it had been reset from the MKB and/or PMI/GPMI. In an NFPA 72 Local - Campus system, this command has no system-wide effect because it only resets the NCCG. Event Display and Acknowledgment UL864 9th Edition The event display has changed for the UL864 9th Edition. For the 9th edition, the oldest (in contrast to the newest) highest priority events will be at the top as the default. The new queue priority order is: Alarm Supervisory Security Trouble Securities are now above troubles. INs for an event appear before the OUTs. This new order of events is reflected on the display when the UL864 9th Edition queue priority is on. 5-3

185 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The display of unacknowledged events is also changed for the 9th edition. The top priority unacknowledged event appears at the top of the event display, as it did before this option existed. However, other unacknowledged events do not appear below this event. They display sorted in with the acknowledged events, in order of arrival. This was done to prevent the bumping of acknowledged events off the screen as new unacknowledged events came in. As each event is acknowledged, the remaining unacknowledged events will shift in turn to the top. Viewing Events in the Graphics Window ZOOM IN This button or the key allows the operator to get a closer look at the location in alarm by displaying the appropriate map from the graphics data base. This button only affects the GRAPHIC WINDOW. NOTE: The graphic assignments are usually made during configuration. For a CAD graphic, the "Zoom In" works depends on the configuration: If the CAD drawing is one of the configured zooming levels, "Zoom In" will display the next image level, regardless of whether it is CAD or bitmap. If the CAD drawing is configured as the last zooming level or the only zooming level, "Zoom In" will zoom in the CAD drawing to a predefined maximum zooming level. ZOOM OUT This button or the key returns the graphic display to the previous zoom level. For a CAD graphic, the "Zoom Out" works depends on the configuration: If the CAD drawing is one of the configured zooming levels, "Zoom Out" will display the previous image level, regardless of whether it is CAD or bitmap. If the CAD drawing is configured as the only zooming level or was zoomed in by the CAD zooming engine, "Zoom Out" will zoom out the CAD drawing to a predefined minimum zooming level. NEXT This button or the key highlights the next text event and displays its corresponding graphic in the graphic window. PREV This button or the key highlights the previous text event and displays its corresponding graphic in the graphic window. 5-4

186 Chapter 5 Operation Displaying Event Information - System The SHOW button or the key allows the operator to display lists of information about the current state of the system. When either of these buttons is pressed, the following window pops up: Figure 5-5 Show or Print System Information Window If the Show dialog box (Figure 5-5) becomes unhighlighted or appears inactive during operation, press the key. ALARMS To view or print a list of current system-wide alarms, Click on the Alarms button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-6 List of Devices in Alarm For Node Window 5-5

187 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual SUPERVISORY To view or print a list of current global supervisory events, Click on the Supervisory button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-7 List of Supervisory States For Node Window The events in the supervisory queue are displayed on the NCCG in the same format as the List Supervisory print item in the MXL or XLS menu. SECURITY To view or print a list of current security events, Click on the Security button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-8 List of Security States For Node Window The events in the security queue display on the NCCG s screen in the same format as the List Security print item in the MXL or XLS menu. 5-6

188 Chapter 5 Operation TROUBLES To view or print a list of troubles, Click on the Troubles button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-9 List of Troubles For Node Window The events in the Trouble queue are displayed on the NCCG s screen in the same format as the List Trouble print item in the MXL or XLS menu. STATUS To view or print a list of the current status points in the system, Click on the Status button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-10 List of Status States For Node Window 5-7

189 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual DISABLED To view or print a list of disabled devices, Click on the Disabled button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-11 List of Disabled Devices for Node Window ANALOG NOTE: All detector readings are displayed in Percent per Foot by default. If the legacy value of "Volts" for the MXL is required, check the option "Report MXL Device Readings in Volts" found in More > Setup > Systems > Options. To view or print the analog voltages of a particular device, Click on the Analog button, or Press the + key. The following window pops up: 5-8 Figure 5-12 Show Analog Readings for Module Window

190 Chapter 5 Operation Enter a module address and click on the DO IT button. The following window pops up: Figure 5-13 List of Analog Readings for Devices in a Given Module Window THRESHOLD To view or print the current threshold readings of a particular device, Click on the Threshold button, or Press the + key. The following window pops up: Figure 5-14 Show Device Thresholds for Module Window 5-9

191 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Enter a module address and click on the DO IT button. The following window pops up: Figure 5-15 List of Threshold Readings for Devices in a Given Module Window SENSITIVITY To view or print the sensitivity readings of a particular device, Click on the Sensitivity button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-16 Show Device Sensitivities for Module Window 5-10

192 Chapter 5 Operation Enter a module address and click on the DO IT button. The following window pops up: Figure 5-17 List of Sensitivity Readings for Devices in a Given Module Window MODULE TYPES To view or print the modules on a particular node, Click on the Module Types button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-18 Show Module Types for Node Window 5-11

193 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Enter a node number and click on the DO IT button. The following window pops up: Figure 5-19 List of Modules in a Given Node Window To view the firmware revisions for all the COM boards or modules (HUB-4, etc.) on an NCC-WAN, enter the NCC node address and click on the DO IT button. The following window pops up: Figure 5-20 List of Module Types and Firmware Revisions for an NCC The firmware revisions include a Base Firmware (Base FW) and an Application Firmware (Appl FW). For a HUB-4, it also shows the COM (1-4) port revision firmware version. For boards not present in the system, but entered into the WAN Components network map, will appear for the revisions. The boards must be local and not remote on an NCC for this command to work. 5-12

194 Chapter 5 Operation DEVICE TYPE To view or print the device types connected to a particular module, Click on the Device Type button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-21 Show Device Types for Module Window Enter a module address and click on the DO IT button. The following window pops up: Figure 5-22 List of Device Types in a Given Module Window 5-13

195 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual MESSAGES To view or print a list of the all messages associated with a particular module, Click on the Messages button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-23 Show Device Messages for Module Window Enter a module address and click on the DO IT button. The following window pops up: Figure 5-24 List of Device Messages in a Given Module Window 5-14

196 Chapter 5 Operation NODE STATUS To view or print a list of the current status of the system, Click on the Status button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 5-25 List of Node Status Information Window The node status lists all nodes for which the NCC has the configuration. The configuration name (either CSGM or Zeus), version number (MMB or PMI version), UL system type, and the event counts shows for each of the nodes. DONE To exit the SHOW dialog box and return to the main display, Click on the Done button, or Press the + keys. Displaying Event Information - By Node The status bar at the bottom of the screen is used to indicate the general state of nodes attached to the NCCG. When a node button is pressed on the System Node Status Bar the following window pops up: Figure 5-26 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (MXL) 5-15

197 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 5-27 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (MXL on CMI) Figure 5-28 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (XLS) Figure 5-29 System Node Status Bar - Dialog Box (XL3 on HUB-4) When the DISCONNECT button is pressed, the selected node is disconnected from the NCC. DISCONNECT and CONNECT buttons do not appear for HUB-4 connected panels. MONITOR button allows monitoring events of a panel. When this toggle button is pressed, it changes to 'Monitor OFF,' the node button becomes gray and the NCC stops reporting events from this node. REQUEST button requests control of a panel from another NCC that has control. XL3 panels do not show configuration information, as the NCC does not import XL3 configurations. When the CONNECT button is pressed on the System Node Status Bar, the following window pops up: 5-16 Figure 5-30 Connect Node Window

198 Chapter 5 Operation Press CONNECT to reconnect to the disconnected node. Press RELOAD and the NCC downloads the entire contents of the CSG of that node, regardless of any NCC settings or the NCC node. The ACK button will acknowledge the highest priority event type for this selected node only. Note that this button is not available in proprietary mode (72D). The SILN button will toggle the silence state for this selected node only. All other nodes are unaffected. If the Inhibit Multiple Reset Filter is selected (SETUP > SYSTEM > OPTIONS > MORE) the following window pops up when the RESET button is pressed on the System Node Status Bar when less than 2.5 minutes has elapsed after pressing the DISCONNECT button: Figure 5-31 Reset Operation Query Window The Reset Operation Query window shows the amount of time remaining in the reset operation. Level 'C' operators and higher can select to either Continue With Reset or Cancel the operation. If Continue with Reset is selected, the system will complete the first reset and then subsequently reset the system for each time the Reset button has been pressed. If Cancel is selected, the system will complete the Reset procedure, but will not continue with further resets. When the SHOW button is pressed on the System Node Status Bar the following window pops up: Figure 5-32 Show or Print Node Information Window 5-17

199 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Node information can be displayed for each of the following events: Alarms Supervisory Security Troubles Status Disabled When each button is pressed, a window pops up displaying information in the same format as described in Figures Local/Global Operation General Description Multiple NCCs within an XNETed system can be configured to allow each NCC (local) to control only specific MXL/XL3/XLS panels, while a master NCC can receive all panel conditions yet not be in control of any area. This form of operation has many uses, e.g., in large buildings or campuses where full visibility is required at a single location but individual tenants control locally. The Request, Grant, Deny Control feature further enhances the Local/Global operation to allow the transfer of system control between NCCs, thereby maintaining a single point of control over individual panels. For example, an operator can Request Control of an MXL/XL3/XLS from the controlling NCC. This request may be granted by the operator, denied, or control will be automatically granted within 30 seconds should no one be at the granting location. General Limitations The number of MXL and XLS panels that can connect to the NCC through XNET is 64 and each must have a unique address within this range. Additional nodes, from 64 to 520, are assigned either to a panel that is connected to the HNET via a HUB-4 or with advanced networking and multiple XNETs. All node numbers controlled by the NCC must be unique, however, the HNET-WAN allows the panel numbers of single or global FSI networks to be mapped to the range of Advanced networking also allows the panel numbers of multiple XNET networks to be mapped to node numbers in the range of Note that each panel on a remote FSI global connection counts as a node in the NCC. Any MXL, XL3 or XLS connected to the NCC via the HUB-4 will not support panel to panel logic; However, MXL and XLS panels connected directly to XNET will support panel to panel logic. MXL, XL3 and XLS Grouping Setup The node status bar normally displayed at the bottom of the NCC WAN screen normally indicates which individual MXL/XL3/XLS panels are being monitored or controlled by an NCC WAN. However, with the Node Grouping Feature, the 5-18

200 Chapter 5 Operation MXLs, XL3s and XLSs can be configured with a single ICON to represent a group of panels. There are no restrictions as to how panels are grouped, but usually it would be by building or area. Additionally, MXL/XL3/XLS panels can be grouped by MXL/XLS network (XNET) or connected through a HUB-4. On a multiple NCC system, nodes can be grouped together regardless of where they are connected. Grouping allows multiple MXL/XL3/XLS panels making up one building to be referred to on the NCCG status bar as one entity. Acknowledging, displaying, and printing of individual reports are unaffected by this grouping. Group names must be exactly the same in all NCCs if request, grant, deny control transfer is to be used with groups. Group names are case sensitive, so watch the use of upper and lower case characters, etc. when entering the group name on different NCCs. If a group name is changed, exit out of a group edit and enter back in before adding or deleting group members. Figure 5-33 Network Component Setup With Group Button Selecting the Group button in the network component setup (See Figure 5-33) will bring up the Group Setting window as shown in Figure Figure 5-34 Group Setting Window To add a new group name, click the mouse on the Add button in the Group Setting Window withouth first selecting any of the existing groups. This will bring up the Add group window as shown in Figure If an existing group is se- 5-19

201 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual lected when the Add button is clicked, the Edit A Group Window will pop up instead showing the nodes assigned to that group. Nodes can then be added to or deleted from the group as describing in the following page. Figure 5-35 Add A Group Window Enter the new group name in the Group box and a description of the group in the Description box. Note that the group name is case sensitive. Then click the Add button. You will be taken back to the Group Setting Window with the new group added to the list. Now select the new group from the list and click the Add button. This will cause the Edit A Group window to appear as shown in Figure The group name and description will be shown in the top two boxes. The main box will show a listing of the nodes that have been assigned to this group. As this is a new group, the box will be empty. Figure 5-36 Edit A Group Node Map To add nodes to a group, click the Add button. The Add a Node window will pop up as shown in Figure 5-37 with a list of available nodes which can be added to the group shown in the box. Select a node and it will be highlighted as in the figure. Next, click the Add button. The node is added to the group and you return to the Edit A Group window with the node in the list. Continue selecting nodes until all the nodes for the group have been chosen. To delete a node from the group, select the node from the list in the Edit A Group window and click the Delete button. 5-20

202 Chapter 5 Operation Figure 5-37 Group Add a Node Window To completely remove an entire group from the NCC, go to the Group Setting Window. Select the group name and then click the Delete button. MXL/XLS Network Status Bar As discussed in the MXL, XL3 and XLS Grouping Setup section, the node status bar can represent either a single node and/or a group of MXL/XL3/XLS panels. The button's background represents the three modes of operation of an individual MXL/XL3/XLS and/or group (network) of MXL/XL3/XLS panels: White background indicates that this NCCG is monitoring that group. (Details on Monitor Mode are outlined in the NCCG Monitor Mode section.) Gray background indicates that group is not being monitored or controlled by this NCCG. Color backgrounds indicate control or command mode and follow the same rules for an MXL/XL3/XLS node. (Details on Control Mode are outlined in the NCCG Control Mode section.) Red indicates at least one alarm is active in that group. Yellow indicates at least one trouble is active in that group. Green indicates all panels in the group are normal. Other colors indicate supervisory, security, downloading CSG-Ms, synchronizing, etc. Text and graphics area of screen reflect the activity of the groups being monitored. A group button has a different appearance than a standard panel icon used on a node button. Manipulating MXL, XL3 and XLS Groups Clicking the group button on the status bar brings up the group dialog box. Refer to Figure

203 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 5-38 Group Dialog Box The group dialog box contains the following elements: Window title with the name of the group. Name of group and number of MXL/XL3/XLS panels. The total number of alarms, troubles, supervisories, and securities for the group. The number in parentheses is the number of acknowledged events. Five operational buttons to allow: Monitor mode: Allows this NCC to monitor this group of MXL/XL3/XLSs. [Note: If this NCC is in control (command mode), clicking this option is ignored.] Should this NCC be in the Monitor Mode, the button is relabeled as Monitor Off. This allows the user the ability to switch back and forth. Request for control or command of a group (see Local/Global operation). Reset connected panels (global) for all members of that group. Siln - to silence nodes in the group. Show is used to list the alarms, troubles, supervisories, or securities of a group. These can be directed to a printer if desired. Details: This button is used to show the node status toolbar for all members of the group. The node status bar, as shown in Figure 5-39, will appear floating so that it is not confused with the group status toolbar. Use the Close button to turn off mode status bar. This button, when clicked again, will toggle the node status bar off. Figure 5-39 Node Status Toolbar Individual Node buttons will appear on the toolbar for all the panels that are not assigned to a group. When the individual panel/node button is depressed, the node dialog box will appear for that node (See Figure 5-40). The additional buttons on the dialog box are Monitor (to switch monitor mode on and off) and 5-22

204 Chapter 5 Operation Request (to request control). These buttons will work the same as for a group, except they will pertain to only that node. These buttons will not appear for a system with only one NCC. Monitor Mode Figure 5-40 Node Dialog Box A white background on the node or group status icon indicates that the node or the group is in monitor mode. An NCC in monitor mode has no control of the system. The system cannot be reset in monitor mode. When events are acknowledged on the NCC which is in control (command) mode, the acknowledgment check mark is placed on the NCC in monitor mode. The new events, not acknowledged yet at the NCC in control, can be acknowledged locally at the NCC which does not have control. They will stay unacknowledged at the system panels and at the NCC in control (command). The NCC is able to show the activity from the monitored group with respect to the text events and graphics areas. Listing or Show commands are also operational. Monitor mode can be turned off manually for a group or node by clicking the node or group status bar button and using the Monitor Off button. Figure 5-41 is an example of an NCC group status line in monitor mode for the last group. The colored frame around the outside of the white group status button indicates the current state of that group. Figure 5-41 NCC WAN Group Status Line With Last Group In Monitor Mode Color backgrounds indicate control or command mode and follow the same rules for an MXL, XL3 or XLS node. (Details on Command Mode are outlined in the NCC Command Mode section.) Red indicates at least one alarm in that group. Yellow indicates at least one trouble in that group. Green indicates all panels in the group are normal. Other colors indicate supervisory, security, downloading CSG-Ms, synchronizing, etc. Text and graphics area of screen reflect the activity of the groups being monitored. 5-23

205 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Control Mode A colored background on the node or group status bar button indicates that node or group is in control mode. The text event and graphics areas of the NCC WAN reflect the activity of the groups or nodes in control mode. Acknowledgment is required and control is allowed. A mix of monitoring mode and control mode is allowed in an NCC. For monitored nodes, commands other than list commands do not go to the panel. Figure 5-42 shows an example of an NCC WAN group status line with the last group in control mode. Control mode of a group or node cannot be thrown to another NCC WAN. Someone at that NCC WAN must request the group or node. Refer to the Request/Grant/Deny Transfer of Control section for details on transferring control. Figure 5-42 NCC WAN Group Status Line With Last Group In Control Mode Full System Control The following buttons are on the MORE commands screen: SUMMARY and FULL SYSTEM CONTROL. FULL SYSTEM CONTROL has the following features: Is password protected as configured in the More-Setup-System-Logon- Security Level-Full Control command. Provides an ARE YOU SURE message box with OKAY and CANCEL buttons to allow pullout for errant press of the buttons. Allows an authorized user to obtain full control without having to request it. Summary Screen Showing Where Control Lies A summary screen showing where control lies on each group can be brought up from the MORE command s dialog box by clicking the SUMMARY button. This node/group summary screen will show for all groups and all MXL/XL3/XLS nodes for which NCC has control of each specific remote panel. The text referring to the NCC in control will be the node name and custom message. WAIO System Node Button If you have a WAIO system configured in NCC, one or more WAIO nodes will be displayed on the system node status bar as shown in Figure Figure 5-43 System Node Status Bar - With WAIO 5-24

206 Chapter 5 Operation Clicking the WAIO button on the status bar brings up the WAIO node dialog box. Refer to Figure Figure 5-44 WAIO Node Dialog Box The WAIO dialog box contains the following elements: Window title with the node ID. Number of WAIOs and MUXs (future use) configured in this WAIO system. The total number of alarms, troubles, supervisories and securities for this WAIO system. Three operational buttons to allow: Reset connected WAIOs and MUXs (future use) for this WAIO system. Show is used to list the alarms, troubles, supervisories, or securities of this WAIO. These can be directed to a printer if desired. Details: This button is used to show a matrix with all configured WAIO nodes for this particular WAIO system. The matrix, as shown in Figure 5-45, will appear floating so that it is not confused with the WAIO Dialog Box and the Node Status Bar. This button, when clicked again, will toggle the matrix window off. Figure 5-45 Matrix Showing Configured WAIO Nodes Each button in this matrix represents one WAIO node with a maximum of 96 WAIO nodes in one WAIO system. The color of each button indicates its status. Pale Gray - indicates a non-configured WAIO "X" - indicates a configured, but disconnected WAIO Red/Yellow/Green - indicates Alarm/Trouble/No Events 5-25

207 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Clicking on any one of the buttons in the matrix brings up a WAIO Module Dialog Box as shown below: Figure 5-46 WAIO Module Dialog Box The WAIO dialog box contains the following elements: Window title with the WAIO ID and the WAIO system node ID. The total number of alarms, troubles, supervisories, and securities for this WAIO. Two operational buttons to allow: Reset connected WAIO is there is a configured reset as the output. Show is used to list the alarms, troubles, supervisories, or securities of this WAIO. These can be directed to a printer if desired. Request/Grant/Deny Transfer of Control Control cannot be transferred to an NCC. It must be requested away from an NCC that already has control of the fire panel. A time-out feature will transfer control of an NCC that loses communications while it has control. Refer to the previous section. Control is requested by selecting the group's status bar button. On the dialog box that appears (see figures 5-26 through 5-29), click the Request button to bring up a Command Request dialog box (Figure 5-47). Figure 5-47 Command Request Dialog Box 5-26

208 Chapter 5 Operation The Command Request dialog box shows the following: Group requesting command to confirm it is correct. A countdown timer that shows in seconds when automatic control will be granted. A Cancel button is provided to pull out of a request, if desired. A status message will appear at the NCC having control: Attention - Command Has Been Requested (Figure 5-48). This dialog box will show the group that control is requested for and which NCC requested it. The user has a choice of Granting or Denying Control. Lack of a response will cause the countdown timer to take control automatically (See next section). Figure 5-48 Attention - Command Requested Dialog Box The command request dialog box (Figure 5-47) will remove itself when command mode is granted or in the event of a time-out (30 seconds). The requesting NCC will then enter command mode for this group. The group status toolbar and the text and graphic areas will reflect the current state of the group. Monitor mode will be removed from any other group and the background of the group status toolbar will go gray to reflect this. Countdown Timer for Automatic Transfer of Control The countdown timer for automatic transfer of control allows control of a group to be obtained whether or not someone is present at the controlling NCC and whether or not the controlling NCC is communicating. In any case, control must be requested first. Control will not automatically be transferred to an NCC unless someone at that location requests the control. The countdown time for the time out is 30 seconds. Complete Loss of Control Handling and Notification When the NCC loses control of a group, the group acts as though it lost its own local NCC. Network failures ( Network Disabled ) are reported by the NCC losing control, telling the user that loss of a connection has occurred. For NFPA 72 Local - Highrise it will allow MXL and XLS panels to gain control through the MKBs and PMIs. All MXL and XLS panels in the group will report Node Not Responding troubles for the missing NCC. 5-27

209 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual NCC Database Synchronization Data entered into one NCC WAN can be transferred to any other NCC WAN by the backup and restore command to a CD or an external USB drive. After a database exchange, the network settings node map must be renamed to correctly identify the This Unit and the type of NCC WAN node where the database is installed. The database exchange is completed in the following manner: 1. Save a database on one NCC through the MORE - SETUP - SAVE system database backup and restore command feature. 2. Take this saved database to another NCC and restore the database on this NCC by using the MORE SET UP LOAD system database backup and restore command feature. Logging Printer Output For Control or Monitor Mode The logging printer will only log events for nodes or groups for which this specific NCC has control. All local NCC commands are logged to and reports generated by any commands steered to the report printer. The logging printer must be enabled for all proprietary-configured systems. Report and Graphics Printer Output For Control or Monitor Mode Report and graphics printing, if enabled in system options, will exist for an NCC whether it is in control mode or in monitor mode. However, if neither of these modes is enabled for a group or node, executing commands that generate reports or graphic printouts will not be allowed. There are two new selections on the Printers Setup Screen. The first is "Fit to Page" for large format graphics printers. The second is "Enable Independent Report Printer Only" which is used to set up a printer dedicated to printing reports. (Refer to Figure 5-49.) 5-28

210 Chapter 5 Operation Figure 5-49 Printers Setup Screen Event and Command History (Global with Filter by Group) Event and command history will be kept on a global basis. Each NCC records all events despite its display mode and all events will be logged into the local history file. Command requests will also be logged into local history identifying the user and the NCC where the command was performed. History Data Conversion to Comma Delimited Text File An option is provided in "Generate History File Reports" to output a comma delimited text file to the hard drive. The selection for this option is located in the MORE - HISTORY - CREATE REPORT Files notebook page. The section titled "History Report Destination" has a radio button with the selection External. By selecting this option, the NCC will allow creation of a file in the \NCC2 directory. An authorized user with the proper password can retrieve this file. (Note: The NCC must be shut down to provide access to the PC desktop for file retrieval.) Color Pallet This option provides the user with the ability to adjust/modify the color of the icon which represents the IN and OUT condition of an off-normal point. The pallet, by design, allows the use of the full color spectrum available, limited only by the video card and monitor. The color pallet can be found in the MORE - SETUP - DISPLAY- COLOR MENU. (Note: Care must be taken when modifying the default colors. The Alarm and Trouble colors, red and yellow respectively, should be left at the factory default setting.) 5-29

211 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Fly Over Comment This feature of the NCC System allows the operator to add comments to an event by hovering over the event icon located at the beginning of the custom message at the far left of the screen. Once the cursor changes to a question (?) mark, the operator can left click the mouse and a pop-up screen is displayed allowing the following actions: 1. A comment can be added which will be printed and appended to the History Log. 2. The point can be Armed or Disarmed by clicking on the proper radio button. Also note that if the NCC Graphics option is in use, the same results can be achieved by selecting the desired icon on the graphic map. Display Node Name To assist the operator in identifying a Node Location, a feature has been added to allow the Node Name, as entered in the Node Setup Menu (MORE - SETUP - NETWORK - NODE - DISPLAY - DISPLAY NODE NAME), to be displayed along with the abnormal event (see Figure 4-50). When this option is set, the Node Name will be displayed above the Time and Date of the off-normal point and the Node Address (which is normally displayed in this location), will be moved below the condition type on the far left of the message line. (Note: The default setting is node number only positioned above the time and date.) Figure 5-50 Display Node Names 5-30

212 Chapter 5 Operation Multiple NCCs Operation with Vectoring Mode NCC Node Vectoring can be used on a network system with multiple NCCs, where at least one NCC must be configured to Full view and control, and other NCC may be configured for a partial view. See figure Figure 5-51 NCC screen in Vectoring mode The full view NCC will monitor all events types, all nodes and groups. At least one NCC must be configured to full view and control. The partial view NCCs: Can be set to display only certain event types, for an example, Alarm or Life Safety events only, filtering out the rest of events. Can be set to monitor only selected network nodes/group of nodes, while ignoring others. Can be pre-configured for combination of displaying certain event types only on the nodes/groups selected for monitoring, with at least one NCC is set to display and monitor all. 5-31

213 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Limitation: It is NOT possible to set on NCC a matrix of node and event vectoring, where Alarm (one type of event) is displayed on nodes (i.e.,nodea & nodeb), while Supervisory (the other event) set to display on the other nodes (i.e., nodec, noded, & nodee). If an NCC is configured for Alarm event vectoring (only alarm events will be displayed on this NCC) then alarms from all nodes will be annunciated on the NCC. If level D operator, press FULL Control button on the NCC which is in active vectoring mode, the control will be granted to only nodes selected for Vectoring, and no effect on the out-of vectoring scope nodes. The Local events pertaining to the NCC itself, i.e.,off-line trouble for NCC printer, Zeus Configuration mismatch, PC hardware faults, faults of HNET modules on NCC WAN, Node Not Responding to the NCC, and other local troubles (refer to Appendix E) will be displayed continously, even if the Trouble type is not selected in the Vectoring Event List selection. Global Reset cannot be executed on an NCC in partial view, even if there are no unacknowledged events on the entire network, but there is an acknowledged event on a node residing out-scope of the vectoring NCC. In this case an error message is displayed, "Cannot reset, there are events out of display scope of the NCC". At least one NCC must be monitoring all events for all nodes (configured for Vectoring mode Off). The NCC must be able to request and obtain Control of entire system at anytime. The option 'Allow Control for Multiple NCCs' on the NCC System Option must be unselected for this case to allow Request-Grant- Deny between NCCs. Multiple NCCs can be configured to have control without Request-Grant-Deny with vectoring mode option enable. For this scenario, partial control of the same network nodes are allowed from multiple NCCs on a 'first-come-first served', and the requirement for at least one NCC with Vectoring Off must be in place. To configure Vectoring, open the NCC System Option dialog (refer to Chapter 4) and perform the following steps: NCC System Options> Option tab >More Options> select the Control Vector ing checkbox for Multiple NCCs option. NCC System Options > Display tab > Vectoring tab - move the desired nodes into the selected area for Vectoring scope. NOTE: The remaining nodes not selected for Vectoring will be out of the Vectoring scope, and will not be manipulated by the NCC. 5-32

214 Chapter 5 Operation Vectoring Indicators and Control The NCC Status line will change from dark-green to dark-purple-blue to indicate active Vectoring mode. The entities on NCC Status Line in white bold are for events to be displayed on this NCC, i.e. NCC set to display alarm ALR=1, security SEC=0, and Status events STA=0, ACK= 'xxx' is always bold. The entities on NCC status line in thin-gray is vectored off event types, so if these events exist on the network, they will be counted by not displayed in the list on the NCC. Figure 5-52 NCC Status Line in Vectoring Mode In example, Figure 5-52, there exist on the network,1 alarm, 1 supervisory, 0 security, and 98 trouble events. The NCC displays only alarms, security and staus events, because the Vectoring scope has been configured for alarm, security and status event only. NCC Nodes Status bar displays the nodes which are not selected for vector ing (ignored) in light purple-grey color, i.e., node MXL Garfield 15, group of nodes MXLS, and XLS node 4. See Figure 5-53 for Out of Scope icons. All the buttons in Node Control window for an Out-Of-Vector-scope nodes are disabled, with an exception of the Show button. Evnets from all network nodes in out-of scope still can be seen on the NCC. Figure 5-53 Node is out-off Vectoring Scope 5-33

215 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The icons for the node/groups that are in the Vectoring Scope (Vectored In) will have the background shade as: top event color, if the NCC is in Control of the node/group: white with a colored frame, if the NCC is monitoring the node without control; dark-grey, if the node/group is not monitored (Monitor Off) but if is in the Vectoring Scope. Figue 5-54: NCC System Setting for Vectoring Scope In Figure 5-54 example, Groups N-1-6-7, N-9-&-8, and individual nodes 2,3, 5, 10, 11,16, 17 and 18 are selected for vectoring Scope with one Alarm, Security, Status events visible on this 59. Group MXLS, and individual nodes 4 and 15 are not selected, so they are out of scope of Vectoring. The NCC 21 and 59 should not need to be selected for Vectoring. 5-34

216 Chapter 5 Operation The icon of the group of nodes selected for Vectoring is shown in the color of the top priority event with group. Each node belonging to a group can be controlled individually by clicking on the group icon > Details button > click on the node icon. Figure 5-55: Group in Control within Vectoring Scope. Figure 5-55 shows that control buttons are enabled for the group of nodes vectored to this NCC. 5-35

217 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 5-56: Alarm in the Group out-of Vectoring scope Figure 5-56, displays that only the 'Show' button is selectable for the group MXLS, which were not selected for Vectoring. All the other buttons are disabled. The group icon has a purple-grey background. In this example, Figure 5-56, node 12 within MXLS group has an active alarm and not a silenced audio. The alarm is from the out-of-vectoring, it does not appear on the NCC, but the total alarm count is increased by one. NOTE: There is no way to control out-of-scope alarm by the NCC in Partial View, unless the Vectoring mode is interrupted. In the following example on Figure 5-57, node 11 is selected in Vectoring Scope, but it is set to be Monitored Off on this NCC. This node will be shown with the grey background, but Node control buttons are available. To request control, click on the Monitor button; Node 11 icon will change to white background > Press Request to receive control of a node within the Vectoring scope. Control will be greanted within 30 seconds if no other NCC denies the control request. 5-36

218 Chapter 5 Operation Figure 5-57: Node in Vectoring Scope by Monitor(off) Vectoring Mode Temporary Disable by a Fault of Full View NCC: If the NCC in full vew fails to communicate while Vectoring Mode is active on the NCC in partial view, the Vectoring NCC will switch out of partial view automatically upon discovering the fault. The following indicators will be displayed: The NCC status line changes from dark-purple-blue to dark brown. The entities on the Status line have the same normal font.. The icons of the nodes configured to be out of Vectoring Scope on the NCC will automatically become monitored. The color will change to something other than gray or purple-gray. The NCC may request control for any node on the system. All events types, despite the vectoring selection, from all nodes will be annunciated on the Vectored NCC while Full View NCC remains disconnected or down. If any NCC on the network regains Full View, the NCC configured for Vectoring will return back to its original Vectoring mode automatically. Full Monitoring must be presented on at least one NCC in the network, refer to figure

219 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Fi Figure 5-58: Vectoring mode interrupted In example Figure 5-58, 21, which was in full view mode, is disconnected. 59 which was in the Vectoring mode, automatically obtains the full view. The supervisory and alarm from MXL node 12, which is out of vectoring node scope on the NCC, are annunciated. The NCC can now control node 12 and other nodes set to be out of vectoring scope, as long as 21 remains lost. The trouble and supervisory events, which are out of scope of 'Event Type' vectoring on this NCC are posted in the list. The total event acount is updated on the NCC status line. Vectoring can be temporarily overwritten by the User buttons assigned to the Time Control events programmed by marco/manual commands. 5-38

220 Chapter 5 Operation Example: a) Time Control Event # 1 to be excuted automatically every weekday at 4 p.m. to turn on the preset Vectoring displaying only Alarm events on the NCC; the fire watch station ignores the troubles and supervisory events once the maintenance crew went home: To revert to pre-set Vectoring scope use script: MONITOR/N. b) Time Control Event #2 to be executed on Monday June 23, 2014 at 7 a.m. to turn off the preset Vectoring and to display all types of events on the NCC while the maintenance crew works in the facility, use the script : MONITORN/A. 5-39

221 Chapter 6 Manual Operation 6 Manual Operation The NCCG Manual Operation Command set is composed of three categories: Core Commands Fixed System Macro Commands User Defined Macro Commands These functions can be accessed by using either a standard or a touch screen keyboard. If you wish to use the touch screen keyboard, configure the NCCG System Settings - Options Tab as described in Figures 4-4 and 4-5 on page 4-4. Entering Core System Commands To enter a core system command: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Manual button, or Press the + key If you have not selected the touch screen keyboard in the NCC-G System Settings - Options tab, the following window pops up: Figure 6-1 Manual Command Entry Window 6-1

222 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The Manual Command Entry window contains a drop down list of the last 20 manual commands issued. To access this drop down list, click on the end of the command line and a scroll down list will appear. To activate one of the existing 20 manual commands, double click on the desired command and execute the command by clicking Do It or Do It and Exit. If you have selected the touch screen keyboard, the keyboard pops up as illustrated in Figure 4-6 on page 4-6. Type the command and press Enter or Click on the OK button. Core Commands The following Core Commands are available in NCCG and are summarized in table form in Appendix C: Command Processing When the NCC-G attempts to interpret a command, it searches the basic commands and any user defined macro commands looking for a match. Generally, the parser allows a three-letter abbreviation to be used rather than the full name. For example, ACK is sufficient to run the Acknowledge command. If the user creates a macro that is the same first three letters as a basic command or another macro, then more characters are needed to determine the result. For example, suppose that a user created a macro with the name DISARM. This command duplicates the first four letters of the basic command DISABLE. Therefore, the user needs to enter five letters, DISAR for DISARM, or DISAB for DIS- ABLE, to eliminate the contention. ACKnowledge Command This command is used by the operator to acknowledge an active event in the system. The result of issuing this command varies, depending on the UL system type selected. COMMAND ACK/AX ACK/TX ACK/SX ACK/BX ACK/1 ACK/I x@y ACK/N x ACTION TAKEN Acknowledge all alarms Acknowledge all troubles Acknowledge all supervisories Acknowledge all securities Acknowledge the top event Acknowledge an individual event on node x, event number y Acknowledge all of the highest unacknowledged type on node x ACKNOWLEDGING NFPA 72 LOCAL - HIGHRISE CONFIGURATION In the highrise configuration, all of the block acknowledgment modes are avail- 6-2

223 Chapter 6 Manual Operation able to the operator. Use the /X modifier at the end of a command to acknowledge all events of the selected type. Individual acknowledgment of the highest event is still available to the operator, although it is not required by code. ACKNOWLEDGING NFPA 72 LOCAL - CAMPUS CONFIGURATION In the campus configuration, the operator does not directly acknowledge the remote nodes (MXLs). Acknowledging the NCC-G only quiets the local audible device in the PC and does not alter the display or remote nodes. There is no special effect obtained by using any modifiers. ACKNOWLEDGING NFPA 72 PROPRIETARY CONFIGURATION In the proprietary configuration, only the topmost event on the display is acknowledged. Any attempt to block acknowledge is rejected. DEEnergize Command The De-energize command turns off an output device if that device was disarmed or if it is a pseudo device. De-energizing a device with this command has the same effect as performing the operation at an MXL s/xls's annunciator control panel. To de-energize an output device in MXL, type: DEE NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] (For example, DEE 33: [ENTER]) To de-energize an output device in XLS, type: DEE NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or DEE NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] DEVice Command The Device command sets the sensitivity of any device in the system that has variable sensitivity settings. (The DEVice command is not supported for WAIOs.) To set the sensitivity, enter the DEV command along with the /S modifier, the node/device address, and the sensitivity value you wish to set. In MXL type (MXL detectors on ALD loop in MXL node or MXL detectors on MLC loop in XLS node), DEV/S NODE:MODULE-DEVICE SETTING VALUE [ENTER] (For example, DEV/S 33: H2 [ENTER]) In XLS type, DEV/S NODE:MODULE-DEVICE SETTING VALUE [ENTER] or DEV/S NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE SETTING VALUE [ENTER] The device settings to choose from are as follows: H4 = High 4 (applicable to detectors on DLC loop only) H3 = High 3 H2 = High 2 H1 = High 1 6-3

224 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual N = Normal L1 = Low 1 L2 = Low 2 L3 = Low 3 (applicable to MXL detectors on ALD or MLC loop only) Individual device sensitivities, thresholds and analog voltages can be displayed by using the MOD command. DISable Command The Disable command can disarm the input or the output of a device. When used with the /N modifier, this operation disconnects an entire node. DISARM A DEVICE Disarming a device with this command has the same effect as performing the operation at an MXL s/xls's annunciator control panel. Using this command with the /O modifier disarms an output device. To disarm an input device in MXL, type: DIS NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] (For example, DIS 33: [ENTER]) To disarm an input device in XLS, type: DIS NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or DIS NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] To disarm an output device in MXL, type: DIS/O NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] (For example, DIS/O 33: [ENTER]) To disarm an output device in XLS, type: DIS/O NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or DIS/O NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] To disarm a device with component, type: DIS NODE:MODULE-DEVICE^COMPONENT [ENTER] (For example DIS 33: ^2 [ENTER]) OR DIS/C NODE:MODULE-DEVICE CC [ENTER] Where CC is the component abbreviation from the table above (For example DIS/C 33: R1 [ENTER]) 6-4

225 Chapter 6 Manual Operation DISARM A DEVICE WITH COMPONENT (XLS ONLY) In this form of disarm command, the /C modifier is used along with a two letter abbreviation for the selected component as shown in the following table: COMPONENT ABBREVIATION Abbreviation AA Description Audible Alert Component A C Action Component (Vesda) AE Audible Evac Component A L Alert Component (Vesda) AM Ambient Component AO Audible Other Component CO Carbon Monoxid e Component CV Conventional zone EV Evac Component F 1 Fire 1 Component (Vesda) F 2 Fire 2 Component (Vesda) LD LED MC Multi-Criteria Component NE P2 Neural OT Other Component PS Pseudo Component R1 P2 Relay 1 R2 P2 Relay 2 R3 P2 Relay 3 R4 P2 Relay 4 S1 Switch 1 S2 Switch 2 S3 Switch 3 S4 Switch 4 S C Scan Component (Vesda) SM Smoke Photo Component TH Thermal Component 6-5

226 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual For disable/enable devices on XLS (DLC or MLC loop) on MXL, the recognized syntaxes are the following: a) DIS 1:2-3 4:5-6 7:8-10>11 - to disable all inputs and outputs of the devices (multiple devices per line, mix of single and ranges, no components) b) DIS/I 1:2-3 4:5-6 7:8-10>11 - to disable all inputs of the devices (multiple devices per line, mix of single and ranges, no components) c) DIS/O 1:2-3 4:5-6 7:8-10>11 - to disable all outputs of the devices (multiple devices per line, mix of single and ranges, no components) d) DIS 1:2-3^1 4:5-6^2 - to disable an individual component of devices (multiple devices per line but with single only component listed after caret. No ranges) e) DIS/C 1:2-3 SM TH R1 - to disable multiple components, listed as a two-letter abbreviation separated by a space, of the same device (only one device per line. No ranges) f) DIS 1:2-3^SM 4:5-6>10^TH 7:8-9^R1 - to disable a single component existing on multiple devices (multiple devices per line, mix of single devices and ranges, but only one component of any type listed as a two-letter abbreviation after caret) NOTE: Syntax like 7:6-5>10^2 or 7:6-5>10 TH, where a component mentioned for a range of devices, is not supported. DISCONNECT A NODE This form of the Disable command, using the /N modifier, disconnects a node from the network and allows its local annunciator to gain control. While in the disconnect mode, both the remote node and the NCCG display a trouble message indicating this state. To disconnect a node, type: DIS/N NODE [ENTER] (For example, DIS/N 5 [ENTER]) ENAble Command The Enable command can arm an input or output device. When used with the /N modifier, this operation connects a previously disconnected node. ARM A DEVICE Arming a device with this command is functionally identical to performing the operation at an MXL s/xls's annunciator control panel. Using this command with the /O modifier arms an output device. To arm an input device in MXL, type: ENA NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] (For example, ENA 33: [ENTER]) To arm an input device in XLS, type: ENA NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or 6-6 ENA NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER]

227 Chapter 6 Manual Operation To arm an output device in MXL, type: ENA/O NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] (For example, ENA/O 33: [ENTER]) To arm an output device in XLS, type: ENA/O NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or ENA/O NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] ENABLE A DEVICE WITH COMPONENT (XLS ONLY) This form of enable command uses the /C modifier and the two-letter abbreviation for the component as seen in the table on page 6-5. To enable a device with component, type: ENA NODE:MODULE-DEVICE^COMPONENT [ENTER] (for example ENA 33: ^2 [ENTER]) OR ENA /C NODE:MODULE-DEVICE CC [ENTER] Where CC is the component abbreviation from the table above (for example ENA/C 33: R1 [ENTER]) CONNECT A NODE This form of the Enable command, using the /N modifier, connects a node to the network and returns its local annunciator to its standby condition. To connect a node, type: ENA/N NODE [ENTER] (For example, ENA/N 5 [ENTER]) CONNECT A NODE WITH AUTOMATIC DATABASE DOWNLOAD This form of the Enable command, using the /N and /X modifiers, connects a node to the network and forces a database download from the MXL node. To connect a node with forced database download, type: ENA/NX NODE [ENTER] XL3 Disable and Enable Commands The following is an addendum for operation on XL3 devices. NOTE: XL3 devices can only be controlled with the manual commands. To arm, disarm, and control XL3 devices, use the following commands: For XL3 POX Solid State (POX-SS) use the O modifier. The NCC-WAN will accept this modifier for an XL3 as meaning POX SS and allow 6-7

228 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual devices in the range 01-1 to An example command for arming and disarming a POX-SS device 01-1 on node 3 is as follows: DIS/O 3:01-1 ENA/O 3:01-1 Note: The letter modifiers follow command modifiers used by XL3. There is address overlap on XL3 output devices. This explains why the O is used for XL3 to mean POX SS only and on MXL it means any output. The only XL3 devices that can be armed or disarmed without a modifier are the input devices (INX). For XL3 POX Relay use the R modifier. The NCC-WAN will accept this modifier for an XL3 as meaning POX Relay and allow devices in the range 01-1 to An example command for arming and disarming a POX Relay device 01-1 on node 3 is as follows: DIS/R 3:01-1 ENA/R 3:01-1 For XL3 SPX Outputs use the S modifier. The NCC-WAN will accept this modifier for an XL3 as meaning SPX Output signaling devices and allow devices in the range 01-1 to An example command for arming and disarming a SPX Output 01-1 on node 3 is as follows: DIS/S 3:01-1 ENA/S 3:01-1 For XL3 Loop Disarm use the L modifier. The NCC-WAN will accept this modifier for an XL3 as meaning Loop Disarm and allow loop (or module) addresses in the range 11 to 84. An example command for arming and disarming a Loop Disarm of INX loop 11 on node 3 is as follows: DIS/L 3:11 ENA/L 3:11 For XL3 INX Addressable Relays use the T modifier. The NCC-WAN will accept this modifier for an XL3 as meaning INX Addressable Relays and allow devices in the range to An example command for arming and disarming an INX Addressable Relay device on node 3 is as follows: DIS/T 3:11-01 ENA/T 3:11-01 For XL3 INX Addressable Inputs use no modifier. The NCC-WAN will accept this for an XL3 as meaning INX Addressable Inputs and allow devices in the range to An example command for arming and disarming an INX Addressable Input device on node 3 is as follows: 6-8 DIS 3:11-01 ENA 3:11-01

229 Chapter 6 Manual Operation ENErgize Command The Energize command turns on an output device if that device is disarmed. Energizing a device with this command is the same as performing the operation at an MXL s/xls's annunciator control panel. To energize an output device in MXL, type: ENE NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] (For example, ENE 33: [ENTER]) To energize an output device in XLS, type: ENE NODE:MODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] or ENE NODE:MODULE.SUBMODULE-DEVICE [ENTER] MODule Command The Module command displays or prints information about a module and its devices in the system. (The MODule command is not supported for WAIOs because there are no analog devices to read on a WAIO.) The user can generate the following reports by adding one of the indicated modifiers: MODULE COMMANDS Modifier Description / A Analog voltages for all detectors attached to a module / S Sensitivity for all detectors attached to a module / T Thresholds for all detectors attached to a module / C Device types / M Messages for the devices in the module / N Sensitivities for all devices in a module The basic form of this command (MOD) generates the report in the command window of the display. Using the L modifier at the end of a command generates a listing on the system printer. Note: Do Not repeat the "/" or add any spaces between modifiers. For example, to display all analog voltages that are on ALD loop 3 in MXL node 4, the operator types the following command: MOD/A 4:3 [ENTER] To list all of the device messages from the same module on the system printer, the operator types the following: MOD/ML 4:3 [ENTER] Any listing generated on the system printer begins with a heading that describes the type of report. The listing ends with the phrase End of Listing printed at the end of the report. 6-9

230 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual NODe Command The Node command allows the operator to display or print the operating status of any node in the system. (The NODe command is not supported for WAIOs.) The basic display with the /V modifier includes for all nodes on the network: Node number and custom message Software and configuration revision levels Number and type of active events For example, with the /V modifier, no node address is used. Use the /D modifier or /M modifier to produce a diagnostic report for network activity. Use the /R modifier to reset node diagnostic for network activity for all nodes. Use the /C modifier to list all modules on a given node: NOD/C 32. Use the /L modifier with any form of the command to create a printed report on the system printer. PASsword Command To log off, or lock, the console, type PAS/L and press ENTER. The operator is obligated to log off when leaving the console. After logging off, the operator must log on again before performing any system operation. If using simple passwords, the user can log on using: PASSWORD ppppp [ENTER] Where ppppp is the password for the level of access. If using user name and password mode, the user can log on using : PASSWORD uuuuu,ppppp; [ENTER] Where uuuuu is the user name and ppppp is the password RESet Command The Reset command causes all or part of the MXL system to perform a full reset. If the command is followed by a node number, then only that node is reset. If the command is followed by the /A modifier, then all nodes are reset. During a System reset, the NCCG sends a panel reset command to each node in the system. As each node responds with verification of the reset, the NCCG clears the event list of all paired events. [A paired event is defined as a cycle in the monitoring process where two event list entries together have 1.) recorded a device becoming active and being acknowledged, and then 2.) going inactive and again being acknowledged.] The reset operation causes any unpaired active event, such as an alarm, to generate a corresponding inactive event that must be acknowledged by the operator. 6-10

231 Chapter 6 Manual Operation The System does not allow the operator to reset any node having unacknowledged events of any type. Use RES/G ggggg to reset all nodes within a group ggggg using: RESET/G ggggg [ENTER] Where ggggg is a valid group name within the current network system. SHOw Command The Show command allows the operator to see various lists of active conditions displayed in a window. A modifier used on the end of the command determines which data is displayed; SHO (with no modifiers) shows all active events in the system. SHO/A shows active alarms only. SHO/S shows active supervisories only. SHO/B shows active security (burglary) alarms only. SHO/T shows active troubles on the system only. SHO/UA shows unacknowledged alarms. SHO/UT shows unacknowledged troubles. SHO/D shows disabled devices. SHO/M shows active status. (only status devices that are configured to display) SHO/UM shows unacknowledged status. (only status devices that are configured to display) In addition to a modifier (such as, /A, /S, /T, /B, /U, or /D) the Show command accepts a node number as an argument. In this form, the command displays only the requested items from the specified node. For example: SHO/UA 10 shows only unacknowledged alarms from node 10. SHO/G ggggg, where ggggg is the exact (case sensitive) group name - shows a list of active events in the network group ggggg. SILence Command The Silence command silences (turns off) and unsilences (turns on) audible devices in the system. In an NFPA 72 Local - Campus configuration, the silence command is limited to the audible device (PC speaker) within the NCCG only. Use the Silence command without modifiers to silence the audible devices in the list of nodes that you specify. Use the /U modifier to unsilence the devices. 6-11

232 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Use the /T modifier to toggle the state of the audible devices. Toggling changes the state of the audible device from sounding (unsilenced) to silent, or from silent to sounding. Use the /X modifier to act upon all the nodes in the system. This modifier can be used with the other Silence command modifiers to produce the desired effect on a system-wide basis. Use the /M modifier to temporarily silence the NCC audible. The /G modifier will cause command to silence or un-silence all nodes within the specified group SILENCE/G ggggg [ENTER] Where ggggg is a valid group name within the current system Note: The Silence command can only operate on a node if all pending alarm conditions are acknowledged. The following examples show various uses of the Silence command. Type SIL 5 and press ENTER to unconditionally silence (not toggle) the audibles in node 5 only. Type SIL/U 5 8 and press ENTER to unsilence the audibles in nodes 5 and 8. Type SIL/X and press ENTER to silence all audibles in the system. Type SIL/TX and press ENTER to toggle the audible state in the entire system. In an NFPA 72 Local - Campus configuration, none of the modifiers has any effect. Regardless of the form of the Silence command that is used, only the audible device located within the NCC is silenced. This does not apply to the NCC-GL. Commands for Network Node Control The monitor and control commands are the command line equivalents of the "Monitor" and "Request" buttons on the node control dialog. These commands only have effect in a multiple NCC environment with at least two command centers active. If this NCC is not in communication with another NCC, then all monitor and control states are cancelled and this command center reverts to full view and control. MONitor Command The monitor command controls the ability to show (monitor) or hide node and event type display operations. It can turn on and off the monitoring of a single node, switch between the predefined types of events or all events, or switch 6-12

233 Chapter 6 Manual Operation between the predefined nodes and all nodes. This command can only accept a single node or group per operation. Typically, the command can be abbreviated as MON. Predefined event settings set on NCC are in More > Setup > System > NCC System Options > Display > Vectoring tab. Refer to the section on Vectoring on page XX. Option Description / A Turn on display of all events. /F Turn off monitoring of the node or group. The node button will grey out and the events will be removed from the event list. / G Act on a group. This may be combined with /F. / N Revert to predefined event settings. Examples: To turn off monitoring of a node that is not in control, type: MON/F 2 [ENTER] To turn off monitoring of a group that is not in control, type: MON/FG AGroupName [ENTER] To turn on monitoring of a node, type: MON 2 [ENTER] To turn on monitoring of a group, type: MON/G AGroupName [ENTER] To turn on monitoring of all event types on an NCC with event vectoring, type: MON/A [ENTER] To return to the preset event types on an NCC with event vectoring, type: MON/N [ENTER] CONtrol Command The control command is used to manipulate the control scope of nodes and groups. This command can only accept a single node or group per operation. Typically, the command can be abbreviated as CON. 6-13

234 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Option /A Description Allow for the display and control of all nodes. This temporarily turns off node vectoring but does not gain control, which requires an additional command. Note that if NCC restarted, it reverts to the initial settings in Vectoring. / G Act on a group. /N /S Revert to predefined node control settings. Control of nodes that are out of scope NCC will be transferred back to the master. The status line on the top of the NCC display in Vectoring mode has a navy blue color. Request full control (only available for D level operators). Note vectoring mode, only the preset nodes will receive control. if the NCC is in node of this Examples: To request control of a node, type: CON 2 [ENTER] To request control of a group, type: CON/G AGroupName [ENTER] To turn off node vectoring, type: CON/A [ENTER] To return to the preset node vectoring on an NCC, type: CON/N [ENTER] To acquire full control of all nodes in the network, type: CON/S [ENTER] 6-14

235 Chapter 6 Manual Operation Fixed System Macro Commands The following Fixed System Macro Commands are automatically installed and cannot be edited or deleted: Command Password Level User Defined Macro Commands FIXED MACRO COMMANDS AAL A Acknowledge Alarm ATR A Acknowledge Troubl e Description ASC A Acknowledge Security ASP A Acknowledge Supervisor y CRS A Reset the System (all nodes) H LP * Help LAL A List Alarms LAV A List Analog Voltage Readings for detectors on specified module LDT A List Device Types on specified module LMS A List Messages for specified entity LMT A List Module Types on specified node LOF A Log Off LSC A List Security Events LSP A List Supervisory Events LSS A List Sensitivity Voltages on specified module LST A List Nodes Status Informatio n LSV A List Sensitivity Voltage on specified module LTR A List Trouble Events LTV A List Threshold Settings on specified module SUA A Silence/Un-Silence Audible User Defined Macros can be executed in one of three ways: Type the macro name in the Manual Command Entry Window, as described on page 6-1, or on the Touch Screen (all user defined macros) Click on the corresponding Macro Number in the User Defined Commands window as shown in Figure 6-2. (U1 through U88 macros only) See Control and Event Customization - Macros on page 4-49 for information about defining macros. Press the corresponding Alt+number key combination, as described in the Function Key Assignments table on page 6-15 (U1 through U10 only). 6-15

236 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual USER Button To access the User Defined Commands window: From the main operator display, click on the USER button near the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the key. The following window pops up: 6-16 Figure 6-2 User Defined Commands Window The User Defined Commands window displays each of the macros that have been named using the U+number (1 through 88 only) naming method. To run macro U1 through U88: From the User Defined Commands window, click on the button next to the macro that you want to run, or To exit the User Defined Commands window: Click on the Done button, or Press the + key. Function Key Assignments The Keys and Function Key Combinations have predefined macros attached to them as described in the Function Key Assignments Table on the next page.

237 Chapter 6 Manual Operation KEY F1 F2 COMMAN D HELP ACK TOP EVENT F3 Silence Toggle F4 F4 F5 F5 F6 F6 F7 F7 F8 F8 F9 F9 FUNCTION KEY ASSIGNMENTS OPERATIO N Context Sensitive Help Acknowledges the top event in the event list window. This is only the NCC Graphics console acknowledge in the CAMPUS system. System audible silence toggle. This is only the local buzzer in the CAMPUS system. Zoom In one level Zoom Out one level Next event Previous event Show reports User commands F 10 (Not applicable) F11 F12 LON Log on dialog pop up S hift-f1 (Not applicable) C RS Reset. This is only the NCC Graphics Console Reset in a CAMPUS system. Shift-F2 SF2 User defined function named SF2 Shift-F3 SF3 User defined function named SF3 S hift-f4 More commands Shift-F5 Shift-F6 Shift-F7 Shift-F8 LSC LTR LAL LSP List Security List Troubl e List Alarm Events List Supervisor y S hift-f9 List event count on all network nodes S hift-f10 (Not applicable) Shift-F11 LOF Log Off S hift-f12 User definited function named SF12 + (Number pad) S IL/ X Silence (no toggle) - (Number pad) S IL/UX Unsilence (to toggle) Enter (Number pad) ACT/ T Acknowledge the top event Alt-1 U1 User defined function named U1 Alt-2 U2 User defined function named U2 Alt-3 U3 User defined function named U3 Alt-4 U4 User defined function named U4 Alt-5 U5 User defined function named U5 Alt-6 U6 User defined function named U6 Alt-7 U7 User defined function named U7 Alt-8 U8 User defined function named U8 Alt-9 U9 User defined function named U9 Alt-0 U10 User defined function named U10 Alt-F1 Alt-F2 Alternate language select English language select Alt-F3 ALTF3 User defined function named ALTF3 Alt-F4 Prompt to close NCC application Alt-F5 ALTF5 User defined function named ALTF5 Alt-F6 ALTF6 User defined function named ALTF6 Alt-F7 ALTF7 User defined function named ALTF7 Alt-F8 ALTF8 User defined function named ALTF8 Alt-F9 ALTF9 User defined function named ALTF9 Alt-F10 ALTF10 User defined function named ALTF10 Alt-F11 ALTF11 User defined function named ALTF11 Alt-F12 ALTF12 User defined function named ALTF

238 Chapter 7 History and Reports 7 History and Reports History - Creating A Report The History feature enables the automatic recording of global system events in chronological order. The events recorded are device activities, operator commands, etc. To enable the NCCG to store, retrieve, and report long-term event history, make sure the History Logging and Reporting checkbox is selected as described in the Options Tab section on page 4-4. To access the History feature: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + keys. The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the History button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 7-1 History Window To generate a history report, Click on the Create Report button, or Press the + keys. 7-1

239 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The following window pops up: Figure 7-2 History: Setup Report Window - Files Tab Set the parameters for the report. NOTE: History reports are typically lengthy and tie up the printer for a long time. Because alarm and trouble processing has priority over history reports, any events occurring during the printing of a report are interspersed in the report. History events are preceded by a vertical bar in the printout; alarm and trouble events are not. The Files tab of the History: Setup Report Window provides the following selections: History Source - Select the source of history data from one of the following two choices: Local The system s history file maintained on the hard disk. Archive Disk/Media A previously archived period of history maintained in a file on disk/media for permanent off-line storage. If you choose this option Click on the Load button, or Press the + keys. Then choose the file to load from the History Archive Select window. Enter the name of the history file from which you will create the report. (See Retrieving an Archived History File on page 7-10 for more information.) 7-2 History Report Destination - Choose screen, printer, external, or XML. If you click on External, the program will save the history report to a plain ASCII text file in a comma delimited format. The output contains three record types COMMAND, EVENT and INFO in the order and format shown in the External History Report File Format table on the next page. Note that all text strings begin and end with quotes.

240 Chapter 7 History and Reports Fieldname Type EXTERNAL HISTORY REPORT FILE FORMAT Description COMMAND (In this example: (Command",27,10,1998,15,31,33,0,0,"*CMD#",00002,"DEFAULT","D","ACKNOWLEDGE/OX") " COMMAND" string 27 integer 10 integer 1998 integer 15 integer 31 integer 33 integer 0 integer 0 integer "*CMD #" string integer " DEFAULT" string Identifies this record type as a command Day of month Month Year Hour Minut e Second Future use Future use Command type Command sequence numbe r User name " D" s tring Login level (*,A,B,C,D,E) " ACKNOWLEDGE/OX " string Body of the command text EVENT (In this example: "EVENT ",25,02,1999,15,35,00,"TRB","IN"," " EVENT " tring Identifies this record type as ",0,2,17,255,"Module Not Responding") s an event (note that the trailing space is always present) 25 integer Day of month 02 integer Month 1999 integer 15 integer 35 integer 00 integer " TRB" string " IN" string Year Hour Minut e Second Event type : ALR - Alarm S EC - Security TRB - Trouble STA - Status SUP - Supervisory Event direction : IN - An incoming event (except for status) ON - A status activation OUT - An outgoing event (except for status) OFF - A status deactivation " " string Acknowledgement type: " "- Unacknowledged (blank field) -LC - Acknowledged from this NCC node -RM - Acknowledged from another node -L? - Local acknowledgement attempt was not confirmed by remote node 0 i nteger Network number of this device (always zero in this version of software) 2 integer 17 integer 255 integer Node number of this device Module number of this device Device number of this device Note: 0 is used to represent a node only message that has no device association 255 is used to represent a module only message that has no device association are valid device numbers " Module Not Responding" string INFO (In this example: "INFO " INFO " string 08 integer 12 integer 1999 integer 14 integer 14 integer 06 integer Custom message for this device ",08,12,1999,14,14,06,"NCC System Restarted") Identifies this record are always present) Day of month Month Year Hour Minut e Second " NCC System Restarted" s tring Informational message. Contents may vary. type as an informational message (Note that the trailing spaces 7-3

241 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual If you click on XML, the program will save the history report to a plain ASCII text file in an XML format. The output contains five tags - report, history, EVENT, COMMAND and RESTART. The following table shows the definition of each tag in the XML file. Tagname Attribute s EXTERNAL HISTORY REPORT FILE FORMAT- XML < report> Declare an NCC report in XML format < history> Declare a history file report < EVENT> Identifies this record type as an event Date Time Type Direction Ack Type Date as mm-dd-yy Time as hh-mm-s s Description Event type: ALR - Alarm TRB - Trouble SEC - Secutiry STA - Status SUP - Supervisor y Event direction: IN or OUT Acknowledgement type: " " - Unacknowledged (blank field) -LC - Acknowledged from this NCC node -RM - Acknowledged from another node -L? - Local acknowledgement attempt was not confirmed by remote node N et Network number of this device (always zero in this version of software) Node Module Device Component SubModule Node number of this device Module number for this device Device number for this device Component number for this device Sub-Module number for this device Event Text < COMMAND> Identifies this record type as a command Date Time Prefix Code Name Date as mm-dd-yy Time as hh-mm-s s Command type Command sequence numbe r User Name L evel Loginlevel (*,A,B,C,D,E ) Command Text < RESTART> Identifies this record type as a system restart Date Time Date as mm-dd-yy Time as hh-mm-s s Restart Text History XML file sample <?xml version= 1.0"?> - <report> - <history> <RESTART Date= " Time= 18:23:56">History purged manually</restart> <EVENT Date= " Time= 18:24:04" Type= TRB Direction= IN AckType= Net= 0" Node= 14" Module= 1" Device= 6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:24:06" Prefix= *CMD # Code= 2430" Name= MASTER Level= E >ACKNOWLEDGE/OX</COMMAND> <EVENT Date= " Time= 18:24:06" Type= TRB Direction= IN AckType= - LC Net= 0" Node= 14" Module= 1" Device= 6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT> 7-4

242 Chapter 7 History and Reports <RESTART Date= " Time= 18:24:59">NCC System Restarted</RESTART> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:24:59" Code= 2430" Name=? Level= * >Logging printer port LPT1 is not assigned to a Windows printer. The Adm</COMMAND> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:25:09" Prefix= *CMD # Code= 2431" Name=? Level= * >PASSWORD</COMMAND> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:25:09" Code= 2431" Name=? Level= * >MASTER << Password Level NOT Authorized</COMMAND> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:25:17" Prefix= *CMD # Code= 2432" Name=? Level= * >PASSWORD</COMMAND> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:25:17" Prefix= Code= 2432" Name=? Level= * >-Log off operator:? Access level=*</command> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:25:17" Prefix= Code= 2432" Name= MASTER Level= E >+Log on operator: MASTER Access level=e</command> <EVENT Date= " Time= 18:25:24" Type= TRB Direction= IN AckType= Net= 0" Node= 14" Module= 1" Device= 6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT> <RESTART Date= " Time= 18:26:53">NCC System Restarted</RESTART> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:26:53" Code= 2432" Name=? Level= * >Logging printer port LPT1 is not assigned to a Windows printer. The Adm</COMMAND> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:27:00" Prefix= *CMD # Code= 2433" Name=? Level= * >PASSWORD</COMMAND> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:27:00" Prefix= Code= 2433" Name=? Level= * >-Log off operator:? Access level=*</command> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:27:00" Prefix= Code= 2433" Name= MASTER Level= E >+Log on operator: MASTER Access level=e</command> <EVENT Date= " Time= 18:27:18" Type= TRB Direction= IN AckType= Net= 0" Node= 14" Module= 1" Device= 6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT> <RESTART Date= " Time= 18:35:32">NCC System Restarted</RESTART> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:35:32" Code= 2433" Name=? Level= * >Logging printer port LPT1 is not assigned to a Windows printer. The Adm</COMMAND> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:35:41" Prefix= *CMD # Code= 2434" Name=? Level= * >PASSWORD</COMMAND> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:35:41" Prefix= Code= 2434" Name=? Level= * >-Log off operator:? Access level=*</command> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:35:41" Prefix= Code= 2434" Name= MASTER Level= E >+Log on operator: MASTER Access level=e</command> <EVENT Date= " Time= 18:35:57" Type= TRB Direction= IN AckType= Net= 0" Node= 14" Module= 1" Device= 6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:36:05" Prefix= *CMD # Code= 2435" Name= MASTER Level= E >ACKNOWLEDGE/OX</COMMAND> <EVENT Date= " Time= 18:36:05" Type= TRB Direction= IN AckType= -LC Net= 0" Node= 14" Module= 1" Device= 6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT> <RESTART Date= " Time= 18:41:16">NCC System Restarted</RESTART> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:41:16" Code= 2435" Name=? Level= * >Logging printer port LPT1 is not assigned to a Windows printer. The Adm</COMMAND> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:41:22" Prefix= *CMD # Code= 2436" Name=? Level= * >PASSWORD</COMMAND> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:41:22" Prefix= Code= 2436" Name=? Level= * >-Log off operator:? Access level=*</command> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:41:22" Prefix= Code= 2436" Name= MASTER Level= E >+Log on operator: MASTER Access level=e</command> <EVENT Date= " Time= 18:41:40" Type= TRB Direction= IN AckType= Net= 0" Node= 14" Module= 1" Device= 6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT> <COMMAND Date= " Time= 18:42:37" Prefix= *CMD # Code= 2437" Name= MASTER Level= E >ACKNOWLEDGE/OX</COMMAND> <EVENT Date= " Time= 18:42:38" Type= TRB Direction= IN AckType= -LC Net= 0" Node= 14" Module= 1" Device= 6">Printer Off Line/Fault</EVENT> </history> </report> 7-5

243 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Then click on the Browse button to assign a file name and location for the file in the following window: Figure 7-3 History Destination Select Window Click on the Date Range tab of the History: Setup Report Window. The following window pops up: Figure 7-4 History: Setup Report Window - Date Range Tab 7-6 Report Starting Date and Time The beginning date and time of the selected file is the default starting date and time. Press the Set button to change this selection. The starting date and time must always be less than the ending date and time. Report Ending Date and Time The ending date and time of the selected file is the default ending date and time. Press the Set button to change this selection. The ending date and time must always be greater than the starting date and time.

244 Chapter 7 History and Reports Defaults Press this button to reset the start and end dates to the file defaults. Set Press this button to choose the start and/or end times and dates for the report. (See Figure Start Date Selection Window) Figure 7-5 Start Date Selection Window Click on the Devices tab of the History: Setup Report Window. The following window pops up: Figure 7-6 History: Setup Report Window - Devices Tab Choose the device or range of devices to be included in this report. Select either Select by device or Device Range (See Figure 7-6) Enter the First Device address and press the select button. Enter the Last Device address (if Device Range was selected) and press the select button. 7-7

245 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 7-7 Select Device Window The Filters tab of the History: Setup Report Window provides the following selections: Filter by Event Type Select the type of events that you want to include in the report. Or, select the All or None buttons to include all events or none of the events. Filter by Operator Logon Select one of the following two choices: All Operators Creates a report for all operators. Select Operator - Creates a report using the information from one operator only. Enter the Logon for this operator in the Operator Logon box. Figure 7-8 History: Setup Report Window - Filters Tab Then, click on one of the following buttons: Start Report: Begins creating the report according to the currently selected parameters. Done: Exit this window without creating a report. 7-8

246 Chapter 7 History and Reports To abandon a history report once it has begun printing, Click on the Stop Report button, or Press the + keys. History - Creating An Archive (See also System Data Base Backup and Restore on page 4-80) The system s current history file is maintained on the computer's hard disk. When enough history accumulates to warrant creating an archive, the system displays the message, "80% MAX HIST" on the status line in the place which is normally occupied by the SYSTEM NORMAL message. When this message first appears, we recommend that you transfer the history to external media until the status message returns to SYSTEM NORMAL. However, the operator may choose to archive the accumulated history of the system at any time. The recorded events are transferred to a USB drive or CD for permanent off-line storage. To perform the archive operation, follow these steps: From the History window, Click on the Archive History button, or Press the + keys. The following window pops up: Figure 7-9 Archive History Window Insert media into the A: drive, CD drive or USB port. The type of media is set in the System Settings Window (refer to page 4-4). 7-9

247 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Click on the Start button, or Press the + keys to archive the current history file to the external media. NOTE: If the diskette is blank and formatted, click the Erase Only (no format) check box. The archive procedure will begin immediately. If the diskette is not formatted, the system will first format the diskette. Archiving will begin once the diskette has been formatted. The USB/External Drive option will display once the USB media is connected. Once the last disk is filled, there may be a long interval while the current master history file is reorganized. At the end of the process, the system displays a message showing the beginning and ending dates and the lines of history archived onto the disk. Write this information on a label and place the label on the disk. If using a floppy disky, place a write-protect tab over the notch of the diskette and file the diskette for possible future reference. Press ENTER when the backup sequence is completed and you have finished labeling the diskette. You may halt the archiving process at any time by pressing the STOP button. If you do so before the disk is filled, the current master history file on the hard disk remains as it was before you began the process. If you press the STOP button after the hard disk packing process begins, the command is ignored. (In a packing process, old records are removed and the remaining data is moved down into those areas, in sequence, to conserve space.) Retrieving an Archived History File Click on the Create A Report button from the Main History menu. Under the Files tab, select Archive Disk/Media for the History Source. Put the media containing the History file in the appropriate drive. Select the History Report Destination (Screen or Printer). Click on the Load button. A History Archive Select window will appear. Choose the appropriate drive, directory, and file name and click on the OK button. This will bring you back to the History Setup Report window. Click on the Start Report button. When you have finished with the report, click on the Done button. To return to the MORE COMMANDS window, Click on the Done button, or Press the + keys. 7-10

248 Chapter 8 Graphic Editor 8 Graphic Editor Introduction Using the NCCG Graphic Editor, you can create or edit the background images assigned to each zoom level. Note: The current version does not support editing a CAD drawing in any valid format. To access the graphic editor: From the main operator display, click on the MORE button at the bottom of the vertical button array on the right hand side of the screen, or Press the + key The More Commands window pops up. From the More Commands window, click on the Setup button, or Press the + keys. The Setup window pops up. From the Setup window, click on the Images button, or Press the + keys. The Images window pops up. Click on the Images tab, then Click on the Create button, or The Graphic Editor window pops up, as shown on the next page. For additional information, see the Creating and Editing Images section in Chapter

249 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual OPEN FILE SAVE FILE PEN COLOR FILL COLOR PEN WIDTH OUTLINE & FILL FILL ONLY OUTLINE ONLY FONT SELECT BACK- GROUND COLOR PALETTE FORE- GROUND COLOR PALETTE DRAWING TOOLS DRAWING AREA Figure 8-1 Graphic Editor Creating a New File To create a new file, Click on File in the pull down menu and select New Image. The following window pops up: 8-2 Figure 8-2 New Image Parameters Window Select the Width (number of pixels), Height (number of pixels) and Background Color for this image and click OK. The window will close and return you to the drawing area of the graphic editor window. If you click on the Default button before clicking OK, the settings will return to the default values (width = 890, height = 590, background color = black).

250 Chapter 8 Graphic Editor Opening a File To open a file, Click on the button or select File and Background Image from the pull down menu. The following window pops up: Figure 8-3 Base Image Window Select the file that you wish to open and click Enter. The image will then appear in the drawing area of the graphic editor window. Selecting Colors To select a pen color, Click on the The following window pops up: button. Figure 8-4 Set Pen Color Window Select the fill color from the left-hand grid or create a custom color by adjusting the hue and saturation. Click the OK button to set the color for the current drawing and outline pen and exit the window. 8-3

251 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual To select a fill color, Click on the The following window pops up: button. Figure 8-5 Set Fill Color Window Select the fill color from the left-hand grid or create a custom color by adjusting the hue and saturation. The fill color previews in the box at the top of the window. Click the OK button to set the color for the current fill and exit the window. Setting Pen Width To select pen width color, Click on the button or select Options and Pen Size from the pull down menu. The following window pops up: Figure 8-6 Set Pen Width Window Enter a number between 1 (narrow) and 10 (wide) and click on the SET button. This changes the width of the drawing and outline pen and exits the window. You can also select pen width by clicking the up and down arrows on the section of the tool bar to choose a pen width number between 1 (narrow) and 10 (wide). 8-4

252 Chapter 8 Graphic Editor Selecting Frame and/or Fill Many of the drawing tools create shapes that have both frames (borders) and fill areas, as shown in Figure 8-1. You can select the way in which these tools draw objects by clicking on one of the following three buttons: Objects have frames and fill Objects have frames only Objects have fill only or select Options and Fill from the pull down menu. Choose from Frame and Fill, Frame Only, or Fill Only. Selecting a Font The Text Tool adds text to your drawing, as described in the Drawing Tools section on page 8-6. To select a font for the Text Tool, Click on the button or select Options and Font from the pull down menu. The following window pops up: Figure 8-7 Set Edit Text Window Select the font Name, Style, Size and Emphasis. Click on the OK button to set the color for the text tool and exit the window. The current font name displays on the tool bar in a window to the right of the Font Select Button as shown below: 8-5

253 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Drawing Tools The drawing tools create and change objects as follows: MOVE TOOL STYLE TOOL ERASE TOOL RECTANGLE TOOL ELLIPSE TOOL POLYGON TOOL PIE TOOL FREEHAND TOOL LINE TOOL ARC TOOL POLYLINE TOOL BITMAP INSERT TEXT EDIT Moves an object Applies the current styles (colors, pen width, etc.) to an object Erases an object. Creates a rectangle Creates an ellipse Creates a polygon Creates a pie wedge Creates a freehand bounded (closed) object Creates a freehand line Creates a curve Creates a polyline (one to many joined line segments) Adds a bitmap image to the graphic Adds text to the graphic Saving a File To save a file, Click on the button. The following window pops up: 8-6 Figure 8-8 Save Window Name the file that you wish to save, select a directory and click the SAVE button. This saves the graphic file and closes the save window.

254 Chapter 9 Web Interface 9 Web Interface Introduction A web interface is included with the NCC software. There is no need to do any extra setup in the NCC to make it work. The TCP/IP network connection is not intended to be used with any public LAN or the internet. This connection must be a secured private network. The Network Card interface settings must be manually configured in Windows to agree with the local network. Call Siemens Technical Support for deploying this feature. Starting The Web Interface Open Internet Explorer TM with the Adobe Flash Player TM plugin from any computer that has a secure TCP/IP connection. In the address section at the top of the browser window, type the IP address or name of the NCC computer and then type /NCC. The Logon window will display. (Refer to Figure 9-1.) Figure 9-1 Web Interface NCC Logon Type in the User ID and Password, using the same information that is used for the NCC. Click on the Connect button. If an incorrect User ID and/or Password is entered, the Logon Error window will display. (Refer to Figure 9-2.) 9-1

255 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 9-2 Web Interface NCC Logon Error Events Display Once you have logged on to the NCC system, the Events Window will display. (Refer to Figure 9-3.) It contains an Events List and Node Buttons. 9-2

256 Chapter 9 Web Interface Figure 9-3 Events Window NCC Events List This list consists of the following six columns as described below: Ack: a check box to indicate if the event is acknowledged or not. Type: an Icon to show the type of event Alarm (red) Supervisory (blue) Trouble (yellow) Security (magenta) Direction: Event State Place Event State: either IN or OUT Place: LC local RM Remote L? acknowledged locally, but message could not be delivered to the remote panel because of a line break, etc. Date: day:month:year hour(24 hour format):minute:second 9-3

257 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Zone: Standard Device Name MXL or WAIO NODENUMBER :MODULENUMBER-DEVICENUMBER XLS The XLS format will be one the following: NODENUMBER :MODULENUMBER-DEVICENUMBER NODENUMBER :MODULENUMBER-DEVICENUMBER^COMPONENT NODENUMBER :MODULENUMBER.SUBMODULENUMBER-DEVICENUMBER Message: Same custom message as displayed in NCC events list Node Buttons Each icon represents a node or a group of nodes. There are five different icons as follows: NCC XLS MXL WAIO Group Node Status The background color of the icon explains the current status of the node as follows: ALARM- red SUPERVISORY blue SECURITY magenta TROUBLE yellow Note: When you move the mouse pointer on top of any node icon, a fly over help will pop up to show the full icon name. Clicking on any of these icons (except the group icon) displays the Node Status Window. (Refer to Figure 9-4.) The window title shows the full node name. Each event type has a counter field next to it. To close the window, click on the "X" button next to the title. Also, you can click and hold the title bar to drag the window to any location. 9-4

258 Chapter 9 Web Interface Figure 9-4 Node Status Window Clicking on the group icon displays the Group Window. (Refer to Figure 9-5.) The window title shows the group name. The node icons that are displayed are the ones that belong to this group as configured in NCC. Clicking on any of these node icons will display the node status window as described above. Figure 9-5 Group Window Note: All node icons display an animation like a heart beat to indicate that the node is working and has a "heart beat". A non-animated icon indicates a disconnected or failed node. A failure is also indicated by a stop sign ( ) on top of the node icon. The audible status of the node is indicated by the following icons: Audible ON (with animated waves emanating from the speaker) Audible OFF (silence) 9-5

259 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 9-6

260 Chapter 10 Advanced Networking 10 Advanced Networking Introduction NCC version 7.81 supports advanced networking, a feature enabled by an option in the NCC system settings. Refer to the following figure. With this advanced network setting and TCP/IP NCC to NCC communications enabled, multiple independent XNET networks with overlapping addresses are now possible. This would be in addition to the NCC-WAN sub-networks added with NCC version The additional XNET networks can be connected via VNTs or additional NCCs using their respective NCC-2F cards. Figure 10-1 Advanced Networking Option Figure 10-2 shows an example of an advanced networking setup. In this example, all NCCs and VNTs are connected together on a TCP/IP network using an Ethernet switch. Three independent XNET networks exist. XNET channel 1 is physically connected to NCC 1 & NCC 2. XNET channel 2 is physically connected to VNT 1, and XNET channel 3 is physically connected to NCC

261 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Advanced networking provides the ability for an NCC to route or feed the TCP/ IP network and remote NCCs the local XNET communications. A backup route can also be assigned in the event of the loss of the routing NCC. In this example, NCC 1 can be assigned to be the XNET router for XNET channel 1 with NCC 2 being the backup XNET router. This means NCC 1 will feed XNET channel 1 panel events, command responses, etc. to the TCP/IP network connected remote NCCs (NCC 3 in this example) and these remote NCCs will have the ability to display or not those events and responses. These remote NCCs will also be able to route or steer commands (if desired) to the proper XNET channel for a panel Figure 10-2 Advanced Networking Setup Also in this example, NCC 3 can be assigned to be the router for XNET channel 3 but it has no backup. If NCC 3 is down, no activity from or to panels on XNET channel 3 can be seen at other NCCs. A VNT requires a master NCC be assigned as this is the NCC that will feed or route activity to and from the VNT s XNET panels. One NCC can be the master for many VNTs. A backup NCC for a VNT can also be assigned. Although it is not shown in the diagram, NCC 1 is configured to be the NCC master for VNT 1, and NCC 2 is configured to be VNT 1 s NCC backup. The multiple XNET networks are referred to as channels. In the network map, there is now a Channels button (See Figure 10-3) which shows and lets you configure the various XNET network channels. Refer to Figure The System Channels screen shows the XNET channels on the NCC system. In the example screen shown, there are three channels, 1, 3, and 4. Channel 3 is repeated twice as it has an XNET master, the NCC at address 30. It also has an NCC Backup at address 10, indicated by the GW Bak column having Yes in it.

262 Chapter 10 Advanced Networking Two or more XNET channels can be members of a router group or route. It is used when it is desired to tie XNET channels together. There is also a route button which is used to configure the routes. An example of a route button output is shown in Figure In this example, which is the default, there are two routes. Route 0 is selected for XNET channels desired to be Isolated, or have no other traffic on them then the panel or NCC nodes physically attached. Supervision heartbeats and traffic from other NCCs or panels on other XNET channels will not appear on Isolated routes. In this example, all other XNET network channels default to route number 1. Figure 10-3 Location of Channels Button Figure 10-4 System Channels 10-3

263 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure 10-5 Router Groups Selecting an XNET channel in the System Channels screen shown in Figure 10-4, and then the Edit button brings up Figure Here the Channel GW (Gateway NCC or VNT)) Name and Description can be edited. Default buttons provide default text for the XNET channel. The Router Group allows selection of a Route. Isolated and Default, described later, are standard selections if no additional routes have been configured. The Routes button is provided here for convenience. The Channel type is only NCC XNET at this time and the Gateway Port is only 1 at this time. The Gateway Port is provided for future multiple NCC- 2F XNET channels on one NCC. Port 1 is the only selection currently available. The Gateway Node allows any NCC or VNT selection to be the gateway or network feed for that XNET channel. Note that the channels for a VNT or NCC are automatically created when adding an NCC or VNT in the network map. 10-4

264 Chapter 10 Advanced Networking Figure 10-6 Edit a Channel Selecting an XNET channel in the System Channels screen shown in Figure 10-4, and then the Map button (or double clicking on a channel) brings up Figure This screen shows all the members of the selected XNET channel and the corresponding node numbers. It also provides the channel name, route, and description. The Add Node button allows adding an already existing (created through the network map) node to this channel. Figure 10-7 Channel Membership 10-5

265 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Advanced networking has changed the network component setup or network map as shown in Figure The Add button has been separated into Add Panel, Add NCC, and Add VNT. Using the Add Panel button brings up the screen shown in Figure The channel selection drop-down list box is provided for advanced networking. This list allows the selection for the XNET channel desired to connect the panel to. For a legacy NCC system installed before advanced networking was provided, the channel selection will be disabled (low lighted) as only one default channel will be allowed. For advanced networking, the Panel Number is the physical XNET address of the panel on the local XNET and this must agree with the panel s address set up in Zeus (XLS) or in the CSGM (MXL). The Node Number is the node assignment seen globally at all NCCs and this is the address that will appear on the events and is the node address used to perform commands to a panel. For example, there can be multiple Panel Numbers of 1 for address 1 on different XNET channels. However, each panel must have a unique Node Number as this is the address seen globally at all NCCs. Figure 10-8 Add Panel The Add NCC button brings up the screen shown in Figure The Node # assignment for NCCs must be between 1 and 64. This is because the Node # is 10-6

266 Chapter 10 Advanced Networking the XNET address for the NCC s local XNET, which has a maximum address of 64. It also becomes the global address assignment seen at other remote NCCs. In the Figure 10-9 screen, there are new selection buttons for NCC Operating Mode for attached XNET connections. The possible selections are: Legacy - If advanced networking not selected, this is the only selection available. Passive - This NCC has no direct XNET connection. Router - This NCC is the master XNET router for the system network. Backup Router - This NCC is the backup XNET router for the system network. The Add NCC screen also contains an area showing XNET channels associated with this NCC. There can be more than one channel as VNTs with XNET networks can be assigned to an NCC also. In this case, both the NCC s XNET channels and the VNT s channels would appear. The TCP/IP Network Address area at the bottom of the screen is where the Ethernet TCP/IP address is entered. For the This Unit NCC that would be the network address assigned in the Windows XP/Windows 7 Control Panel Network settings. For all Remote Unit NCCs, it should be the network address of the remote NCC computer. Note that the settings on this page need to agree at all NCCs, with the exception of the This Unit setting. The This Unit setting is enabled for each NCC at the proper node number. Figure 10-9 Add NCC 10-7

267 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure shows an example of a configured NCC at node address 30 that is an HNET or WAN master, an XNET router for its XNET network, and it is associated with 2 XNET channels, one for its own XNET network and one for an attached node 61 VNT isolated XNET network. This NCC s TCP/IP address is Figure Edit NCC The Add VNT button on the network component setup or network map brings up the following screen shown in Figure 8 Add VNT. On this screen, the VNT Operating Mode selection appears allowing the selection for: Building Fire Command Center Integrated Building - FCC 10-8

268 Chapter 10 Advanced Networking A selection for a NCC Master Router and an NCC Backup Router (optional) is also provided. The VNT will route the XNET network physically connected to it through this NCC (or backup NCC if provided). The XNET channel associated with the VNT will appear in the area labeled Channels Associated with this VNT. The assignment to an XNET channel is automatic and a default channel will appear. This channel can be edited in the list that appears through the Channels button on the network map. On the bottom of the Add VNT screen is the TCP/IP network address. This is where the VNT s configured Ethernet TCP/IP address is entered. Note that the settings on this page need to agree at all NCCs where it is desired to see activity from panels on the VNT s XNET. Figure Add VNT Figure shows a configured VNT. It has an assigned NCC Master Router, and an NCC Backup Router. It also has an assigned XNET channel that is configured to be Isolated, which keeps all remote NCC and panel traffic off of the XNET, with the exception of the NCC Master Router and NCC Backup Router if it exists. The VNT s configured TCP/IP network address appears at the bottom of the screen. 10-9

269 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure Edit VNT Because of the complexity of the advanced network configurations, the network component setup or network map includes tree views of XNET, WAN, and Routes. Refer to Figure Figure Network Tree View Location 10-10

270 Chapter 10 Advanced Networking An example XNET tree view is shown in Figure In this view, NCC 30 is at the top as it is the XNET router for its channel 3 XNET (labeled CH3_30_1) connected on NCC-2F port 1, with an MXL at address 1 and an XLS at address 17. NCC 10 is the XNET backup router for that channel shown on the second line. Figure XNET Tree View In the example XNET tree view, VNT 61 is configured to use NCC 30 as its master NCC so it appears under NCC 30 with its NCC-2F XNET port 1 and a XLS panel address 46. NCC 60 is a remote NCC and it has an XNET channel CH1_60_1 with one XLS panel address 45. An example WAN tree view is shown in Figure In this view, NCC 30 is at the top as it is the HNET master NCC with an HNET connection to the WAN cabinet on its NCC-2F at port 5. NCC 10 is the HNET backup NCC. The HNET HUB-4s and the corresponding port assignments with the type of port, such as FSI, FSIGBL, CMI, WNET (for WAIO) are shown along with the panel assignments. For FSIGBL (FSI Global) ports, the gateway node appears first with the other nodes appearing underneath

271 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure WAN Tree View An example Routes tree view is shown in Figure In the example shown, Isolated routes (Route 0) are shown first. Isolated means that no other traffic appears on that XNET channel other than the panel and VNT assigned master and backup NCCs. For NCC XNET channels, an Isolated channel contains traffic to and from only the physically attached NCCs and the panels. Other NCCs may send commands and get responses from these Isolated channel panels. However, all commands are proxy through the physically attached NCCs. Route 1 or the Default Route provides XNET communication in the same fashion as Legacy or current NCCs. Heartbeats and the blocking of remote XNET NCC traffic is provided through the NCC system options for NCCs on that XNET channel. For routes greater than Route 1 or the Default Route, NCC and panel traffic on any XNET channels assigned is seen on all XNET channels in that route

272 Chapter 10 Advanced Networking Figure Routes Tree View 10-13

273 Appendix A UL Listed Industrial Equipment Ordering Information MODEL NUMBER MATERIAL DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER PCs Only UHW-W717-00T-M UHW-W717-00L-M UHW-W717WAN-00T-M UHW-W717WAN-00L-M SCD-XP-B SCD-XPWAN-B SCD-XP-BT SCD-XPWAN-BT UL 864 I7 PC Hardware w/ Win7 w/ Touch Driver w/o SW w/o LCD* UL 864 I7 PC Hardware w/ Win7 w/o Touch Driver w/o SW w/o LCD* UL 864 I7 PC Hardware w/ Win7 w/ WAN w/ Touch Driver w/o SW w/o LCD* UL 864 I7 PC Hardware w/ Win7 w/ WAN w/o Touch Driver w/o SW w/o LCD* UL 864 Pentium 4 PC Hardware w/ WINXP w/o Touch Driver w/o SW w/o LCD* UL 864 Pentium 4 PC Hardware w/ WINXP w/ WAN w/o Touch Driver w/o SW w/o LCD* UL 864 Pentium 4 PC Hardware w/ WINXP w/ Touch Driver w/o SW w/o LCD* UL 864 Pentium 4 PC Hardware w/ WINXP w/ WAN w/ Touch Driver w/o SW w/o LCD* S54465-C1-A1 S54465-C1-A2 S54465-C49-A1 S54465-C49-A Monitors Only UHW T-L UL 864 LCD 22" Touch Screen S54465-C8-A1 U HW L-L UL 864 LCD 22" S54465-C8-A2 UHW T-L UL 864 LCD 42" Touch Screen S54465-C9-A1 U HW L-L UL 864 LCD 42" S54465-C9-A2 S CD-19L-2 UL 864 LCD 19" SCD-19LT-2 UL 864 LCD 19" Touch Screen Cards and Modules NCC-2F WAIO X-204 SWITCH Network Interface Card for NCC/NCCWA N Wide Area Input-Output Communication Module Scalance X-204 Fiber Switch HUB-4 4-Channel Interface for Communication between panels and NCC HUB-RS-485 Interface Card Module RS MODEM BLOCK HUB-4 Modem Block *See descriptions under UL Listed Industrial Computer specifications on page 2-2. NOTE: Rack Mount Equipment is also available. Contact Siemens Fire Safety at for details. A-1

274 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual A-2

275 Appendix B Latitude and Longitude of Selected Cities City Lat. N Long. W ' ' Albany, NY Atlanta, GA Atlantic City, NJ Baltimore, MD Boston, MA Brownsville, TX Buffalo, NY Butte, MT Charlotte, NC Chicago, IL Cincinnati, OH Dallas, TX Denver, CO Detroit, MI Durham, NC Fairbanks, AK Gary, IN Hartford, CT Honolulu, HI Houston, TX Kansas City, MO Key West, FL Knoxville, TN Las Vegas, NV Los Angeles, CA City Lat. N Long. W ' ' Memphis, TN Miami, FL Montreal, QUE Newark, NJ New York, NY Orlando, FL Ottawa, ONT Philadelphia, PA Phoenix, AZ Pittsburgh, PA Pocatello, ID Providence, RI Quebec City, QUE Reno, NV Richmond, VA Sacramento, CA St. Louis, MO Salt Lake City, UT San Diego, CA San Francisco, CA Seattle, WA Tampa, FL Toronto, ONT Washington, DC Wichita, KS Wilmington, NC Sydney, Australia S E B-1

276 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual B-2

277 Appendix C MANUAL: CORE SYSTEM COMMANDS Command Password Level Modifier Description ACKnowledge A Acknowledge a system event / 1¹ Acknowledge the top event in the list / A¹ Acknowledge an alarm / S¹ Acknowledge a supervisory / B¹ Acknowledge a security event (Burglary) / T¹ Acknowledge a trouble / X Block acknowledge modifier for Local - Highrise DEEnergize² B De-energize (turn off) an output device DEVice B / S Set the sensitivity of a device DISable² B Disarm a device / C Disarm specified abbreviated component on XLS / O Disarm an output device / N Disconnect a node ENAble² B Enable an input device / C Enable a specified abbreviated component on XLS / O Enable an output device / N Connect a node ENErgize² B Energize (turn on) an output device LISt A List all current events on the system printer D ¹ In highrise configurations, required, as shown. ² Command is not applicable to NFPA 72 Local - / A List all current alarms on the system printer / S List all current supervisories on the system printer / B List all current security events on the system printer / T List all current trouble events on the system printer / U List unacknowledged only. Can be used in combination with A, S, B, and T above. / D List all disabled, disconnected, or disarmed devices / N List user names (If option is selected) an X needs to follow the modifier. In proprietary configurations, no Campus. X is C-1

278 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual MANUAL: CORE SYSTEM COMMANDS Command Password Level Modifier Description LOG A Log a user-entered message on the system printer MODule A Display or print information on any module / L Print on the system printer. Can be used in combination with any of the following modifiers. / S Sensitivity report (Volts ) / N CSG sensitivity report (Low, normal, high, etc. ) / T Threshold report / A Analog voltage report / M Device message report / C Device type report NODe B Display or print current node status information / L Print on the system printer. Can be used in combination with the following modifiers. / D Create diagnostic reports for all nodes / R Reset diagnostic reports for all nodes / C Module type report / V Software version report for all nodes P ASsword * Enter an operator passwor d / L Log off (lock) the operator console RESet² C Reset a remote node / A Reset all nodes / S Reset all nodes and the NCCNT-G ² Command is not applicable to NFPA 72 Local - Campus. C-2

279 Command Password Level MANUAL: CORE SYSTEM COMMANDS Modifier Description S HOw * Show all or selected active events in a scrolling window / A Show only alarms / S Show only supervisories / B Show only security events / T Show only trouble events / U Unacknowledged. Can be used in combination with /A, /S, /B, and /T above. / D Show disabled, disarmed, and disconnected devices / M Shows active status SILence B Silence the audible device(s) and/or local NCCNT-G signal / U Unsilence the audible device(s) / T Toggle the state of the audible device(s) / X Act on all nodes /M Mute the NCC sounder for 70 seconds then re-sound C-3

280 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual C-4

281 Appendix D OS/2 to Windows Conversion Before you proceed with an OS/2 to Windows conversion, save the NCC database and all NCC images from the OS/2 computer. To determine which NCC version is installed in your system: From the main operator window, click MORE > SETUP > SYSTEM. The version number will display in the Serial section of the Title tab. If you are using NCC version or higher: 1. Use the SAVE feature in the OS/2 version of NCC (MORE > SETUP > SAVE) to make copies of all images, icons,banners and their linkages onto floppy disks. (See Chapter 4, pages ) 2. Install NCCWN (NCC on Windows XP or 7), following the instructions in Chapter 2, pages If you are going to install Windows TM and NCCNT on the OS/2 machine, thereby erasing all data on the hard disk, make two sets of floppies as a precaution. However, we recommend using two separate hard drives. 3. After installing NCCWN, use the LOAD feature (MORE > SETUP > LOAD) to restore the saved images. Note: You must select "Migrate all files to current default directories" for the automatic translation of drive letters from the OS/2 computer to the Windows computer to occur. (All images will be placed together in the \IMAGES folder on the same drive where Windows NT is installed.) Failure to do so will result in lost images and icons. If you forget, you can repeat the operation again. If you are using an NCC version less than : OPTION 1 Upgrading the OS/2 version of NCC to using the CD-ROM 1. Exit NCC (Alt + F4). 2. Open a command line window. 3. Copy all files from the SBT, Inc. supplied CD-ROM \OS2\NCC2 to the NCC2 directory on your hard disk. 4. Restart the NCC. 5. From the main window, click MORE > SETUP > IMAGES. Select the Images tab on the notebook. Click rebuild. 6. Perform the steps listed in "If you are using NCC version or higher." D-1

282 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual OPTION 2 Upgrading the OS/2 version of NCC to if you do not have a CD-ROM drive on the NCC computer 1. Put the SBT, Inc. supplied CD-ROM in any windows computer with a CD-ROM drive. 2. Locate the directory \OS2\IMAGES. 3. Check the read.me file for instructions on creating floppy disks. 4. Install OS/2 NCC version from the newly-created disks. 5. Restart the NCC. 6. From the main window, click MORE > SETUP > IMAGES. Select the Images tab on the notebook. Click rebuild. 7. Perform the steps listed in "If you are using NCC version or higher." OPTION 3 Saving graphics files without upgrading the NCC to Use the SAVE feature in the OS/2 version of NCC (MORE > SETUP > SAVE) to save the NCC database. 2. Then, save all graphics files in the following manner: a. Exit out of NCC to the OS/2 operating system. b. Manually ZIP (compress using the PKZIP or other appropriate utility) all files from the Images, Icons and Banners directories and copy onto floppy disks. 3. Install NCCWN following the instructions in Chapter 2, pages After installing NCCWN, copy the zipped files onto the Windows computer, unzip (uncompress) and copy these files into the directories of the corresponding name - Images, Icons and Banners. Note: Regardless of the source drive (usually the D: drive) on the OS/2 machine, unzip the images and icons on the Windows machine into the subdirectory where NCCWN is installed (usually the C: drive). 3. Use the LOAD feature (MORE > SETUP > LOAD) to restore the saved NCC database. Note: You must select "Migrate all files to current default directories" for the automatic proper translation of drive letters from the OS/2 computer to the Windows computer to occur. (All images will be placed together in the \IMAGES folder on the same drive where Windows is installed.) NOTE: All non-ul listed Industrial Computers that have OS/2 installed on the C: drive that is the only drive in the system must (after saving all NCC images) first reformat that drive, then install Windows, then install NCCWN. If you are using Model CP7585-P133, performance cannot be guaranteed because it does not meet Windows minimum requirements. D-2

283 Appendix E Event Reporting This appendix describes special notation used to report events not specific to a standard device. These values and notations will be seen in various displays and reports and can be used to address these entities for the purpose of customizing graphics and text. Special Cases NN:MMM-DDD identifies the source of the event uniquely as node NN, module MMM and then the device number, DDD (if applicable). Example 1: 02:100-3 Displays if MXL node number 2 has a NIM-1R/W addressed as 100 indicating that node number 3 is in trouble. Example 2: 02:100-0 Displays device number 0 if there is a custom message or graphic for the module. Example 3: 02:0-0 Displays module number 0 and device number 0 if there is a custom message for the node. Pseudo Modules The NCCG uses Pseudo Devices with a specific address range porgrammed at the fire panel to supervises and reports faults of system components such as PC hardware, HNET modules and connected nodes. System fault events are reported at the NCC in the same manner as fire alarms control panels events. Note that if an NCCG is upgraded to 7.80.xx, and if graphic or text assignments where made for PC hardware fault, Fiber optic faults, etc. in the old configuration; then the module addresses (old address from module 1 to 5) must be moved by hand to the new assignments. Using the standard notation, NN:MMM-DDD identifies the source of the event uniquely as node NN (the NCCG node address) module MMM (Module Address Assignment table) and then the device number, DDD that represents the remote node, module or conditions as defined in the Module Address Assignment table. E-1

284 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Module Address Assignments The pseudo module address range from 1 to 254 is divided into the following groups: Module Address(es) Description Used for HNET module trouble and status reporting. Typical events are "Module not responding", "COM channel fail", "Style 7 Fault", etc Reporting of faults and conditions for each node where the node is represented by a device. Typical events are "Node not responding", "Configuration out of date", etc. 247 PC related hardware faults and conditions. Typical events are "XNET Style 7 Fail", "Fan Trouble", "Printer Trouble", etc. 248 Fiber Optic Switch faults and conditions. Typical events are "FOS not responding", "FOS configuration error", "FOS Redundant power fault", etc. Reporting Node Related Faults and Conditions Pseudo modules 240 to 245 inclusive report node related troubles is generated by the NCC. Because there are more possible node addresses than devices in a pseudo module, the node address range is broken down into groups of 100. Therefore, pseudo module 240 reports nodes 1 to 100. For example, assume the NCCG is at node number 16, and then panel node 10 would report as 16: Similarly, panel node 101 will report as 16:241-1 and panel node 200 will report as 16: Reporting PC Related Faults and Conditions Pseudo module 247 reports NCCG trouble events related to its host PC and communication cards. The following table describes the individual pseudo devices on module 247. E-2

285 Address Function 1 NCC local hard disk read / write failure 2 NCC logging printer problem 3 NCC fan failure 4 NCC Xnet network failure 5 NCC Software key error 6 NCC Xnet channel A fail 7 NCC Xnet channel B fail 8 NCC Thermal problem 9 Smoke control application problem 10 WAIO Commissioning mode trouble Reporting Fiber Optic Switch Faults and Conditions Pseudo module 248 reports trouble events related to the Fiber Optic Ethernet Switches, if they are installed. The device number represents the NCCG internal address as determined in chapter 4. Refer to the 'Fiber Optic Switch List Window', shown in Figure 4-46 to determine the association between this internal address and the TCP/IP network address. E-3

286 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Appendix F Macro Command Programming A Macro command is a small, simple, procedural program that is similar to a Windows batch command. It can contain core commands, command line substitutions and limited conditional statements. A single line in a macro is limited to 140 characters (including substitution expansion) and is terminated by a newline (carriage return or enter) or a semi-colon (;). Conditional statements and labels must be on separate line. Core Command Guidelines The names of the core command set were chosen so that the first three letters of each name would be unique. Type in enough characters to identify this unique name (i.e., EN is not enough since it matches both ENERGIZE and ENABLE). When writing a command script, it becomes part of the command set. Therefore, use enough letters so that core commands as well as any script names are uniquely identified. For example, create the command script DISARM-A, do not use the abbreviation DIS for DISABLE since it now matches two commands - DISABLE and DISARM- A. Use at least 5-letter abbreviation of DISAB as shown below: DISAB 1:1-33>40; DISAB 1:2-11>12; DISAB 1:2-14>16; DISAB 1:2-33>37; DISAB 1:2-43>47; DISAB1:2-50>52; DISAB 1:3-1>7; DISAB 1:3-9>11; DISAB 1:3-16>22; DISAB 1:3-27>28; DISAB 1:1-46; DISAB 1:2-19; DISAB 1:2-26; DISAB 1:2-31; DISAB 1:2-41; DISAB1:1-21; DISAB 1:1-42; DISAB 1:1-7; DISAB 1:1-18; DISAB 1:3-51 Also, a more efficient way to construct the above script is shown below. You can group up to 8 or 9 arguments per line. This will minimize network traffic and allow for faster execution. DISAB 1:1-33>40 1:2-11>12 1:2-14>16 1:2-33>37 DISAB 1:2-43>47, etc. The syntax uses the > character located between the starting device number and ending device number to delineate the range of devices being acted upon by the command. F-1

287 SYNTAX FOR ADDRESS RANGE nnn:mmm-ddd>eee Where n nn = node numbe r m mm = module numbe r d dd = from device numbe r e ee = to device numbe r nnn:mmm.sss-ddd>eee Where n nn = node numbe r m mm = module numbe r s ss = submodule numbe r d dd = from device numbe r e ee = to device numbe r nnn:mmm-ddd>eee^cc Where n nn = node numbe r m mm = module numbe r d dd = from device numbe r e ee = to device numbe r *Refer to the following page for Component Abbreviation F-2

288 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual COMPONENT ABBREVIATION cc AA Abbreviation for device component Audible Alert Component A C Action Component (Vesda) AE Audible Evac Component A L Alert Component (Vesda) AM AO CO CV EV Ambient Component Audible Other Component Carbon Monoxide Component Conventional zone component Evac Component F 1 Fire 1 Component (Vesda) F 2 Fire 2 Component (Vesda) LD MC NE OT PS R1 R2 LED component Multi-Criteria Component P2 Neural component Other Component Pseudo Component P2 Relay 1 component P2 Relay 2 component R3 P2 Relay 3 R4 P2 Relay 4 S1 S2 S3 S4 Switch 1 component Switch 2 component Switch 3 component Switch 4 component S C Scan Component (Vesda) SL SM TH Status LED component P2 Photo Component P2 Thermal Component F-3

289 For example: DISAB 9:40-239>252^R3 7:5-1>8^R1 3:20-162>168^TH 5:20-204>215^SM 1:2-42>60^R1; To disable up to eight arguments per line using one command: Relay 3 on FDCIO devices from 239 to 252 on DLC on XLS Relay 1 on devices from 1 to 8 on node 7 device loop Thermal components of detectors from 162 to 168 on Smoke/Photo/Fire component on detectors from 204 to 215 on on XLS node #5. Relay outputs on devices from 42 to 60 on the loop card 2 on node 1. Notes: If a range of devices are used in the script, the only one single abbreviated component; which is common to all devices in the range, can be used with no space in the string for devices in the range of the component. The ^ caret separates the component, while the > character signifies the range. A single space is use to separate one string of device ranges with its components from the next range of devices. Command Line Substitution Just as with a core command, a macro may have additional arguments (parameters) on the line after its name. These arguments can be separated by spaces or commas up to a limit of 9. For example, assume we have a macro named MYMAC that is expecting 2 arguments, then a command line would look like: MYMAC 5:3, S1 The first argument is 5:3 and the second is S1. In the body of the macro script the first argument will be substituted everywhere; %1 is found. Similarly, the second argument is substituted for %2. The maximum is %9 for a single macro. If the macro script for MYMAC is: DIS/C %1-2 %2; DIS/C %1-5 %2; Then the macro processor will expand it to: DIS/C 5:3-2 S1; DIS/C 5:3-5 S1; F-4

290 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Nesting Macros Macro commands can be called from within other macro commands. A single sequence of nested macros should be limited to a depth of 10, exceeding this number may lead to unexpected results. Command line substitutions from one macro can be passed down the sequence to the next. For further details, refer to 'Conditional Statements' section. Conditional Statements The macro processor recognizes two conditional These can be used to change the sequence of macro program execution allowing blocks of commands to be included or excluded. The commands will cause the execution to jump forward in the macro script. Note these commands cannot jump backward to a label on a previous line. These commands must appear at the beginning of a new line in the command can compare two text strings for equality (==) or inequality (!=). If the compare succeeds the macro processor jumps to the specified label, otherwise the next line will be processed normally. Note that the two strings to be compared cannot be empty, therefore, you will notice the use of a period after the substitution to replace the missing argument. In the following example a command line argument is compared to A. If it matches, the control will be passed to label ARM %1.==A. ARM;... $ARM; Note there are no spaces between the first and second text strings. The target label must be on a separate line, preceded with a dollar sign ($). If the test was for inequality the statement would be %1.!=A. ARM;... $ARM; command will cause a simple forward jump to the specified label. Note this command cannot jump backward in the script. For example to jump to the label END: F-5

291 @goto END;... $END; As a standard example, consider the predefined macro COP (Change Output Point). This macro takes up to three arguments, 1. a device code 2. A for ARM or D for DISARM 3. E for ENERGIZE or D for DE-ENERGIZE (optional argument) The command line is displayed: COP D E The full script %2.==A. %2.==D. END; $ARM; enable/o END; $DISARM; disable/o %3.==D. %3.==E. END; $DENER; deenergize END; $ENERG; energize %1; $END; The argument 2 is tested against A or D, if neither pass then the program ends. If an A was entered then the core command with substitution enable/o 5:20-1 is executed then the macro jumps to the end. If a D was entered then the core command disable/o 5:20-1 is executed. Argument 3 is now tested for E or D and selects the execution of either the core command energize 5:20-1 or deenergize 5:20-1 respectfully. F-6

292 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Appendix G Supported Vector File Formats When CAD images are used in the NCC, the following summary supports the vector file formats is applied. This information was supplied by LEADTOOLS. DWF Format (DWF) DWF is a binary file format used by AutoDesk AutoCAD for storing DWG files on the World Wide Web. DWF is a 2D, vector-based description of drawings and illustrations. LEAD can load the following objects: Background ( Background ), Layer ( Layer ), Polyline ( P ), Polygon ( P ), Polytriangle ( T ), Filled Ellipse ( E ), Outline Ellipse ( E ), and Text ( X ). LEAD can save the following objects: Background ( Background ), Layer ( Layer ), Polyline ( P ), Polygon ( P ), Polytriangle ( T ), Filled Ellipse ( E ), and Outline Ellipse ( E ). This file format is not supported in the non-vector toolkit. Read and write support for this format is provided in the LEADTOOLS Vector toolkit and is unlocked when the Vector features are activated. Read support for this file format may be added to non-vector toolkits by purchasing a file format plug-in. For more information on available LEADTOOLS products, contact LEAD. The file constants associated with this file format are: FILE_DWF DWG Format (DWG) DWG is a binary file format used by AutoDesk AutoCAD. It can contain 2D or 3D objects and offers compression and a CRC check for internal data. LEADTOOLS supports DWG 13, 14 and 15 files, which can load the following objects: LAYER, BLOCK, TEXT, MTEXT, VERTEX 2D, VERTEX 3D, VERTEX MESH, VERTEX PFACE, VERTEX PFACE FACE, POLYLINE 2D, POLYLINE 3D, POLYLINE PFACE, POLYLINE MESH, INSERT, MINSERT, ARC, CIRCLE, LINE, POINT, 3DFACE, SOLID, TRACE, ELLIPSE, LWPOLYLINE, SPLINE, LEADER, DIMENSION ORDINATE, DIMENSION LINEAR, DIMENSION ALIGNED, DIMENSION ANG 3PT, DIMENSION ANG 2LN, DIMENSION RA- DIUS, DIMENSION DIAMETER, ATTRIB, ATTDEF, REGION, 3DSOLID, and BODY. G-1

293 LEADTOOLS currently does not load the following objects: ACAD_PROXY_ENTITY, HATCH, MLINE, OLEFRAME, OLE2FRAME, RAY, SHAPE, VIEWPORT, and XLINE. This file format is not supported in the non-vector toolkits. The support for this format is provided in the LEADTOOLS Vector toolkit and is unlocked when the Vector features are activated. The support for this file format may be added to non-vector toolkit by purchasing a file format plug-in. For more information on available LEADTOOLS products, contact LEAD. The default extension used by this format is: DWG. LEAD supports the object types listed above, as well as, layers and the grouping of objects. Embedded raster objects are not supported. Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) DXF (Drawing Interchange Format) was first introduced by AutoDesk AutoCAD, and is one of the most widely used CAD/CAM/CAE applications in the world. DXF is very popular and is supported by most 3D formats on PC platforms. A DXF file is an ASCII file containing 2D and 3D components representing a drawing. Those components are known as Entities. The DXF file can represent almost any CAD drawing using those entities, and can connect a group of entities together (such as windows, doors, etc.) which can be reused in the file. The DXF file has seen upgraded, from version 2.6 to the latest release version 14. However, the latest release of AutoCAD still manages to open files created with any of the earlier versions. LEADTOOLS supports all current variations of the DXF format (versions 2.6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14) and loads the following objects: LAYER, BLOCK, LINE, 3DFACE, TRACE, SOLID, ARC, CIRCLE, ELLIPSE, POINT, LWPOLYLINE, POLYLINE, SPLINE, INSERT, TEXT, MTEXT, DIMENSION, LEADER, TOLER- ANCE, ATTRIB, ATTDEF, 3DSOLID, VERTEX, and IMAGE. LEADTOOLS can save the following objects: POINT, LINE, SOLID, 3DFACE, POLYLINE, VERTEX, ELLIPSE, CIRCLE, ARC, TEXT, BLOCK, INSERT, and IMAGE. LEADTOOLS currently does not support the following objects: ACAD_PROXY_ENTITY, BODY, HATCH, MLINE, OLEFRAME, OLE2FRAME, RAY, REGION, SHAPE, VIEWPORT, and XLINE. Load any of the DXF files as either vector images or raster images. Load a DXF file, and save it to any of file format that is supported by LEADTOOLS. The file format is not supported in the non-vector toolkits. Read and write support for this format are provided in the LEADTOOLS Vector toolkits and are unlocked G-2

294 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual when the Vector features are activated. Read support for this file format may be added to non-vector toolkits by purchasing a file format plug-in. For more information on available LEADTOOLS products, contact LEAD. LEADTOOLS also supports the ability to save a vector image as a DXF within a TIFF. The file constants associated with this file format are: FILE_DXF FILE_DXF_R12 (R12 DXF) FILE_DXF_R13 (R13 DXF) FILE_TIF_DXF G-3

295 G-4

296 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Appendix H NCC-2F Driver Installation The NCC-2F is a PCI-compliant network card used with the NCC and NCC WAN systems. The NCC-2F allows the user to interface MXL and XLS systems over XNET and to connect to WAN components using HNET. The NCC-2F provides the NCC with an RS-485 supervised network. The module fits in any available PCI 5V-compliant slot. The card is keyed so that it will only fit in the appropriate PCI slot.the module comes preinstalled in the NCC. When a PC with an NCC-2F card is first started, the card will be detected in Windows, and the user will be prompted to install the drivers. The drivers are on the Firefinder NT (P/N ) and the Firefinder NCC NT WAN (P/N ) installation disks. Load the appropriate disk (both disks have the same drivers) in the CD-ROM drive, and follow the instructions for installing the drivers. Each card will automatically prompt the user for drivers. There are three drivers to install: one for the PCI card UART, and two for the PCI communication ports. The outlined installation steps are repeated three times. After the first card is installed, the next card will prompt the user for its drivers. Repeat the following steps for the second card. When all is complete, refer to the Device Manger to check the COM port designations, and view any installation issues. Use the following step to perform the procedure. 1. When the NCC-2F is first installed, Windows will detect the new hardware. At this point select the No, not this time option and click Next to continue. H-1

297 2. Select Install from a list or specific location [Advanced] click Next to continue. 3. Select Browse and navigate to the CD-ROM and locate the OXUART_v512_DRIVERS folder. On the Firefinder NCC, the location is: D:\drivers\NCC2F_DRIVERS\OXUART_v512_Drivers NOTE: If the CD-ROM drive is not D, substitute the proper drive letter for your PC. 4. Highlight the folder, click OK to proceed. The path is populated in the field, click Next to continue. Windows will install the appropriate drivers. H-2

298 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 5. When the following Hardware Installation' message is displayed, click Continue Anyway. 6. The Windows XP Hardware Wizard will install the drivers as displayed: 7. Once the drivers are successfully installed, the following message is displayed. Click Finish to continue. H-3

299 Windows will prompt the user to install the drivers for the serial port. 8. On the Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard window, Select, 'Install from a specific location [Advance] Note: Windows will use the first available COM port for communication. 9. Select "Next>" and navigate to the CD-ROM drive where the OXUART_v512_DRIVERS folder is located. On the Firefinder NCC, the location is: D:\drivers\NCC2F_DRIVERS\OXUART_v512_Drivers NOTE: If CD-ROM drive is not D, substitute the proper drive letter for your PC. 10. Highlight the folder, click OK to proceed. the path is populated in the field, click Next>. Windows will install the appropriate drivers. H-4

300 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 11. On the Hardware Installation warning, click Continue Anyway. 12. Once the drivers are successfully installed, the following message will be displayed: 13 Click Finish. Windows will prompt the user to install the drivers for the additional PCI Communications Port. H-5

301 14 Select the radio button, ' Install from a list or specific location [Advance]. Select Next> and search for the CD-ROM drive where the OXUART_v512_DRIVERS folder is located. On the Firefinder NCC Install CD this location is: D:\drivers\NCC2F_DRIVERS\OXUART_v512_Drivers If the drive is not D, substitute the proper drive letter for your PC. 15. Highlight the folder, click OK to proceed. The path is populated in the field. Click Next>. Windows will install the appropriate drivers. On the Hardware Installation warning message box, click Continue Anyway. 16. Once the drivers are successfully installed the following message will be displayed. Click Finish to continue. H-6

302 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 17 To verify which COM ports were installed and to check that there are no issues, right-click on My Computer icon on the Desktop, and select Properties." Click the Hardware tab. 18. Click on Device Manager. H-7

303 19. Click the + sign next to Ports (COM & LPT). 20. The example below displays two NCC-2F cards installed. They are configured in pairs, i.e., COM 3 and COM 4 are the first NCC-2F and COM 5 and COM 6 are the second NCC-2F. The NCC will use COM three for the first card and COM 5 for the second card. H-8

304 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Installing NCC-2F Driver on Windows 7 After installing the NCC-2F card on the PC, Windows 7 will attempt to install a driver for the NCC-2F card, the installation should fail with the following message: 'Device driver software was not successfully installed', click on Close. Install Window 7 drivers: 1. Insert the NCC-2F CD card driver software in the CD drive on the computer. 2. On the Windows desktop, right click on the 'Computer' icon and select 'Properties' from the drop-down menu. 3. Select 'Device Manager' from the Properties menu. 4. On the message box, 'Do you want to allow the following program to make changes to this computer', select Yes. H-9

305 5. From the Device Manager list select, 'PCI Serial Port' under, 'Other Devices' from the list. 6. Highlight 'PCI Serial Port' and right-click on it, select 'Update Driver Software', from the drop-down menu. H-10

306 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 7. Click on, 'Browse my computer for driver software' from the message box. H-11

307 8. Click on the ''Browse' button and navigate to the CD-ROM drive and locate SP45463 >X86 folder. 9. Highlight the folder x86 and click OK to proceed. D:\drivers\NCC2F_DRIVERS\SP45463\X86 (NOTE: D = the CD Driver) H-12

308 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual 10. On the Update Driver Software-PCI Serial Port window, the path will automatically be populated in the field. Verify the path and select Next. 11. Windows will prompt a Successful message once the install is completed. Click Close. H-13

309 12. To verify that the new COM Ports are ready to be used, refresh the Device Manager tree (F5), under Ports (COM & LPT) the 'Enhanced Communication Port (COM3/COM4)' will be displayed. 13. If additional cards are required, follow the procedure from step 1 of section 'Installing NCC-2F Driver on Windows 7' to install additonal cards. 14. Process is complete. H- 14

310 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Appendix I Troubleshooting Use the following tables for additonal support. NCC ISSUE SOLUTION A "Configuration Error" is reported in UL NFPA 72 Local - Campus Hybrid systems with FireFinder-XLS revision 5 or later. When the user saves or loads the NCC database from NCC NT to NCC XP, the drive mapping may have an issue and the system may crash. C lock stops In upper right hand corner Reboot the NCC system. For the NCC to surpress the trouble, select (enable) "Hide Configuration Error" from the System Settings - Options Tab when configuring the system. Before saving or loading the System Data Base Backup and Restore, select the option "Migrate All Files to Current Default Directories." Smoke Control PC not responding Restart the Smoke Control application by pressing Alt + F4 Smoke Control configuration error, wrong control key Smoke Control configuration error, wrong Building ID. Smoke Control configuration error, file does not exist ACAD Fiber Optic Switch P2 link down (in and out) Check the control keys in the Zeus configuration and.dxf drawings. Please refer to the NCC Smoke Control error reports (DXF error, Zeus error and Merge error). NCC should be restarted to clear out this trouble. Restart the Smoke Control Application. restarted to clear out this trouble. Load all AutoCAD drawings. clear out this trouble. Press Trb-Ack button NCC should be NCC should be restarted to SMOKE CONTROL ISSUE SOLUTION A lt + F4 Key press does not work Touch monitor 1. Press Alt + F4 key. M issing heartbeat Check the ethernet cable. D ata missing from NCC Restart the Smoke Control application by pressing Alt + F4. H eartbeat revision does not match Restart the Smoke Control application by pressing Alt + F4. NCC is not in control To place the NCC in Control mode, go to the NCC PC, press the More button, then the full Control button. N o building icons or drawings show Restart the NCC, then restart the Smoke Control application. R eestablishing connection with the NCC Check the ethernet cable and the fiber optic switch. T ouch screen does not work Detach trouch screen cable. Attach trouch screen cable. I-1

311

312 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Appendix J Open Source In The NCC Public Domain Code Used Embedded in this product are free software files that you may copy on a data carrier, distribute and/or modify under the terms of their respective license: 1) GNOME Libxml2 Ver ) 7-Zip Ver ) PostgreSQL - Ver With a written request, Siemens will supply code inline with the terms of the applicable license. A request must be filed within three years from the date of the product purchase and Siemens expenses are to be paid in advance. Please contact the intellectual property department at: Siemens Schweiz AG Building Technologies Group Intellectual Property Gubelstrasse 22 CH 6300 Zug Switzerland or at any of our registered offices, and enclose proof of purchase reciept to establish the date of purchase. Generally, these embedded free software files are distributed in the hope that they will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even implied warranty such as for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, and without liability for any Siemens entity other than as explicitely documented in your purchase contract. J-1

313 Appendix K Smoke Control: Basic Configuration The Smoke Control package can be purchased separately and allows the user to setup an NCCG with a Smoke Control interface to the XLS panels housed by buildings. To begin network configuration, the smoke control option must be enabled as follows: Enable Smoke Control Option In order to enable Smoke Control in the NCCG System, the Smoke Control must be checked/enabled in the NCCG System Settings Window Options Tab as shown in Figure K-1 below. Figure K-1 Options Tab with Smoke Control Enabled On the System Settings window, check the Smoke Control option. click on the Save button to record any changes and exit, or press the + keys to save changes and exit to the Setup window. Note: The Done command exits to the Setup window without saving any system setting changes. K-1

314 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Configure Buildings For Smoke Control To begin configuring buildings for Smoke Control, go to the Network Component Setup window, follow the Basic Configuration Network as described on page With Smoke Control enabled, the Network Components Setup window will appear as shown in Figure K-2 below. Figure K-2 Network Component Setup for Smoke Control From the Network Component Setup window, click on the Smoke Control button (refer to Figure K-2). The Smoke Control Settings window displays as follows: Figure K-3 Digital Smoke Control Settings Window The digital Smoke Control Settings window allows users to add, edit or remove buildings monitored by the system. Buildings are added or deleted by using the Add Building or Remove Building buttons. Buildings are edited by selecting a building and using the Edit Building button. The Add Building and Edit Building open new windows. Removing a building is done from the Smoke Control Setting window. K-2

315 The column headings in the Smoke Control Setting Window are described below: ID: 1-98 for buildings or 99 for entire site. Each building is assigned an ID number ranging from 1 to 98. The entire site (which encompasses all of the buildings) should be assigned ID 99 and is handled differently. Name: Name assigned to the building or site. Bitmap: The Smoke Control View Bitmap displayed on Monitor 1 or 3 of the Digital Smoke Control System Icon: The Building Icon displayed on Monitor 1 or 3 of the Digital Smoke Control System Default Monitor: The Monitor the Smoke Control View Bitmap will appear on by default. XLS Nodes: The Node IDs of the XLS panels associated with the building Data Merged: Yes if the data for the building was merged with the building database Use the following procedure to configure a building for smoke control. To add a building to the list of buildings, run the Zeus Errors and DXF Errors reports, merge the building into the database and correct the merge errors. The system will not run correctly if there are errors within the configuration. Add a Building From the Smoke Control Settings window, click on the Add Building button. The Add Building window displays as follows: Figure K-4 Add Building K-3

316 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual The Add Building window contains text boxes, radio buttons, and node lists which define how the building graphics are displayed and what nodes are located in the building, as described below: ID: When the Add Building window opens, it is automatically populated with the next available building ID. The user has ability to change the building ID to any number from 1 to 98 providing it is not already in use. Name: This text box is for the building name. It is suggested to use a distinguishable name that is commonly used for the building. Default Floor: This text box is for the user to select a Default Floor (from the building displayed on Monitor 1) that will display on Monitor 2 when the building side view is displayed on Monitor 1. Or the user may select a Default Floor (from the building display on Monitor 3) that will display on Monitor 4 when the building side view is Monitor 3. The user can choose not to have a default floor and leave this text box blank. Default Monitor: This is the monitor that displays the Smoke Control View Bitmap by default. Note: When the smoke control system is started, monitor 1 and monitor 3 will display two buildings by default. To have the system display the building on monitor 1 or 3 at startup, select the respective radio button. Keep in mind that only two buildings can be displayed by default. If Monitor 1 or Monitor 3 is already selected for a different building, the user will not be permitted to select the radio buttons. Assigned Nodes: This is a list of XLS nodes that will be used for Smoke Control for this building. To move a node to Assigned Nodes list click on a node ID from the Available Nodes list. It should be highlighted and the left arrow button should become active. Click the left arrow button and the highlighted available node will move to the Assigned Nodes list. Similarly, to move an Assigned Node back to the Available Nodes list highlight the desired node and click the right arrow button. The node will move from the Assigned Nodes list and onto the Available Nodes list. Note: Each building ID should have at least one node associated with it so carefully plan your Zeus Configuration and Building Graphics. Available Nodes: This is the list of XLS nodes in the network that can be used for smoke control and are not currently in use by any other building. Side View DXF: Type or browse for the graphic that will be used by the Side View of the building on Monitors 1 and 3. The revision of the Side View DXF may also be supplied. Building Button Icon: Type or browse to the graphic that will be used for as the building icon on Monitors 1 and 3. Building region for Site view Monitor: Type or browse to the site view graphic that will be displayed on Monitor 0. When all of the data is entered click the Save button to commit the changes to the database otherwise click cancel to discard the changes. K-4

317 Edit a Building From the Smoke Control Settings window, click on a building that needs to be edited. Once the building is highlighted click on the Edit Building button. The Edit Building window displays as follows: Figure K-5 Edit Building Window The Edit Building window contains the same text boxes, radio buttons, and node lists as the Add Building. Refer to the Add Building section for more information on the settings. All of the building options can be edited except for the building ID, which is grayed out and cannot be altered. Remove a Building From the Smoke Control Settings window, select a building ID by clicking on it. Once the building is highlighted the Remove Building button is available. At this time click on the Remove Building button to remove it from the list. When the confirmation widow appears, click OK to confirm the removal of the building from the system. K-5

318 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Figure K-6 Remove Building Add or Edit Entire Site If a user wants to add or edit the site information, please note the following differences for editing a single building: Building ID#: Building ID 99 is reserved for the entire set of buildings. Building Region for Site View Monitor: A graphic of the entire site should be entered in the Building Region for Site View Monitor file name textbox. Side View DXF and Building Button Icon: These fields should be left blank. Default Monitor, Default Floor and XLS Node Selection: These settings should not be altered. Reports Once a building's information is entered into the system, it is time to check the building s entries within the Zeus database, as well as the building s graphical representation. The names of the controls must comply with the guidelines. There are three buttons used to check for errors under the Reports section of the Smoke Control Settings Window. Zeus Errors The database is checked for conformity with the Zeus guidelines. Each control block appearing on the monitors must have a unique label or key format. The Key format structure is the following Znnn-Cxmm Z Zone nnn The floor number or text C Control x Control descriptor mm Control number (01 to 99) yy Object type K-6

319 Figure K-7 Zeus Error Report If an object in the Zeus configuration does not comply with the Zeus guidelines, errors will be displayed in the Zeus error report. The error messages indicate what needs to be changed in the configuration. To view the Zeus Error report click on the Zeus Errors button from the Smoke Control Settings window. Refer to the tables below. Zeus Error Messages E rror at position 1 The control label must start with "Z" for zone. N o '-C found 'C' signifies the beginning of the control section. Exceeded maximum floor number text size 22 by n characters Floor name or number least 1 character must be at The floor label characters. is too long. Shorten it by n There were no characters after the "Z". I nvalid control descriptor Invalid control descriptor. N o second '-' found after control Missing '-' between control number and object type. Control number There are n Object Type length = n Invalid Object Type must be 2 digits. is an invalid size, Incorrect number of digits for the The object type must be The object types. type was not found control. two alpha characters. among the valid Duplicate Entry K-7

320 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Control Descriptor Object Descriptor X Description yy Description S smoke control AU Auto button P Pressure system OF Off button V Elevator Hoistway vent CL Close button M Mop-up System Fan Control OP Open button W Stairwell PU Purge button X Exhaust Fan System Status PR Press button E Elevator Pressurization Fan System SM Smoke Mode button AL Alarm LED FL Fault LED AC Action (active/open/run) LED NR Normal LED GD Good LED for stairwell LW Low LED for stairwell DXF Errors The database is checked for conformity with the DXF Parser guidelines. Except for the object descriptor, these guidelines are the same as the Zeus parser guidelines. Each control block appearing on the monitors must have a unique label or key format. The Key format structure is the following Znnn-Cxmm-yy Z Zone nnn The floor number or text C Control x Control descriptor mm Control number (01 to 99) DXF Parser Error Messages E rror at position 1 The control label must start with "Z" for zone. N o '-C found 'C' signifies the beginning of the control section. Exceeded maximum floor number text size 22 by n characters Floor name or number least 1 character must be at The floor label characters. is too long. Shorten it by n There were no characters after the "Z". I nvalid control descriptor Invalid control descriptor. N o second '-' found after control Missing '-' between control number and object type. Control number There are n must be 2 digits. '-' was found in the control number Incorrect number of digits for the The control characters. number should control. have alpha numeric I nvalid String String does not comply with format at all. K-8 Duplicate Entry

321 To view the DXF Error Report, click on the DXF Errors button from the Smoke Control Settings window. Figure K-8 DXF Error Report Merge Data The Merge Data button should be pressed after the building ID and its associated parameters have been entered and the Zeus and DXF error reports have been run. Select a building ID to highlight the building to be merged and then click on the Merge Data button. Internally the Zeus Database and DXF Database are compared to ensure that each control listed is represented graphically on the touch screen monitors. If there are no errors the Data Merged column will turn from No to Yes. If there are errors the Data Merged column will remain No and the user will need to click the Merge errors button. An additional window will appear displaying the steps needed to rectify the problems with the merge. Figure K-9 Data Merge Error Report K-9

322 NETWORK COMMAND CENTER GRAPHICS Installation and Operation Manual Appendix L Instructions for NCC Migration to GMS Extraction of NCC or NCC-WAN data Requirements The NCC must be updated to rev or a higher revision to migrate NCC graphics to the GMS. Also, all Zeus and/or CSGM configuration files for all panels must be imported into the NCC. These files are the.xml for XLS panels and the.mxl,.miq, or.bkm for MXL panels. The NCC is normally installed on the c:\ncc2 directory. If a different drive is used, make note of the drive letter for later use. Prior to running the migration, an NCC database "Save" must be performed. Besides preserving the NCC database, the NCC lastbackup directory is used to obtain the NCC panel configuration files, graphics, and icon files. Preparation The NCC can be left running and does not have to shut down. However, no activity that will change the database should occur while the NCC migration is being performed. This includes device edits, database save and loads, etc. Files used to migrate from the NCC to a GMS are provided in a zip file that contains the directory "GmsMigrationFiles". This directory contains four.sql command files used to obtain data from the NCC PostgreSQL database and one batch file, MigrateToGms, which is used to start the process. The files are as follows: 1. MigrateQueryHnetModulesDbToGms.sql 2. MigrateQueryIconDbToGms.sql 3. MigrateQueryNodesDbToGms.sql 4. MigrateQueryScreensDbToGms.sql 5. MigrateToGms.bat Execution Unzip the provided GmsMigrationFiles directory to the root of the c: drive (or other drives containing the NCC) on the NCC PC. Open a Command Prompt window and point to "GmsMigrationFiles" directory. This is done entering: C: <Enter> (replace C with the appropriate drive letter if NCC is installed on a different drive), then cd \GmsMigrationFiles<Enter>. L-1

323 Start the NCC migration by executing the MigrateToGms batch file in this directory by entering: MigrateToGms and press <Enter>. Refer to Figure 1 for details. Figure L-1 Executing batch file in command prompt If the NCC is installed on another drive, start the NCC migration by entering: MigrateToGms and the drive letter separated by a space (no colon). For example, enter: MigrateToGms d for an NCC installed on drive d. The migration is complete when the Command Prompt window returns to a command prompt. Refer to Figure 2 for details. Figure L-2 Return to command prompt after execution L-2

Installation Instructions Model SNC Serial Network Card for USB Application with Windows

Installation Instructions Model SNC Serial Network Card for USB Application with Windows Installation Instructions Model SNC Serial Network Card for USB Application with Windows OPERATION The Model SNC from Siemens Industry, Inc. (as shown in Figure 1) is a USB-compliant network card used

More information

Installation Instructions Model NIC-C

Installation Instructions Model NIC-C nstallation nstructions Model Network nterface Card NTRODUCTON The Model from, is a card that provides HNET/XNET and CAN network communication within and between enclosures. The HNET/XNET network can be

More information

Installation Instructions Model NCCXP-UK

Installation Instructions Model NCCXP-UK Installation Instructions Model NCCXP-UK Upgrade Kit For The Network Command Center Using Windows XP Software Installation All SBT, Inc. computers are preloaded with the NCCG software. Follow the procedure

More information

Cerberus Division. Installation Instructions CERBERUS PYROTRONICS TM Model RDM-MXL. (Remote Diagnostics Module)

Cerberus Division. Installation Instructions CERBERUS PYROTRONICS TM Model RDM-MXL. (Remote Diagnostics Module) Cerberus Division Installation Instructions CERBERUS PYROTRONICS TM Model RDM-MXL Remote Diagnostics Module INTRODUCTION The CERBERUS PYROTRONICS TM Model RDM-MXL module (RDM for connection to the MXL

More information

Installation Instructions Model PSX-12

Installation Instructions Model PSX-12 Installation Instructions Model PSX- Amp Power Supply Extender INTRODUCTI The SIEMENS Model PSX- is a high current power supply extender. The power supply extender works in conjunction with the PSC- power

More information

Installation Instructions Model PSC-17C

Installation Instructions Model PSC-17C Installation Instructions Model PSC-17C 17 Amp Power Supply INTRODUCTION The Model PSC-17C from Siemens Industry, Inc. is a high current power supply that provides the Fire Alarm system (Sprachalarmsystem

More information

Installation Instructions Model ZAM-180

Installation Instructions Model ZAM-180 s Installation Instructions Model ZAM-80 Zone Amplifier Module 80W (500-035600 / S24235-B6-A5 (70V)) Installation Instructions for North America INTRODUCTION The Model ZAM-80 from Siemens Industry, Inc.

More information

Installation Instructions Model RNI

Installation Instructions Model RNI Installation Instructions Model Remote Network Interface INTRODUCTION The IEMEN Model allows for the remote installation of the PMI-REM, D-C-REM (on HNET) and the LCM-/CM-/FCM-/IM-/OCM- (on CAN) modules.

More information

The Model Scalance X204-2 Multimode and X204--2LD Single

The Model Scalance X204-2 Multimode and X204--2LD Single Installation Instructions Model Scalance X204-2 Multimode and X204-2LD Single Mode Ethernet Fiber Switch Fiber Switch Ethernet Connections TRODUCTION The Model Scalance X204-2 Multimode and X204--2LD Single

More information

Installation Instructions

Installation Instructions Installation Instructions Model PAL- Parallel Printer Operation The model PAL- from Siemens Industry, Inc. allows the connection of an ITE Centronics parallel printer to the Siemens FireFinder- XLS, MXL,

More information

Open Graphic Navigator

Open Graphic Navigator Open Graphic Navigator Annunciation Monitoring Control Software Demo Quick Start Guide LT-6072 Rev 0 May 2014 Table of Contents Installation... 3 Hardware Prerequisites... 3 Operation... 8 Starting OpenGN...

More information

NVM-Professional NVM-Server NVM-Server Desktop NVM-Server XL. Windows 2000 Platform Description and Installation Instructions

NVM-Professional NVM-Server NVM-Server Desktop NVM-Server XL. Windows 2000 Platform Description and Installation Instructions NVM-Professional NVM-Server NVM-Server Desktop NVM-Server XL Windows 2000 Platform Description and Installation Instructions This manual has been developed by NEC America, Inc. It is intended for the use

More information

Installation and Configuration Guide

Installation and Configuration Guide Installation and Configuration Guide Trademark Notices Comtrol, NS-Link, and DeviceMaster are trademarks of Comtrol Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

More information

Cover. MATWorX Installation Guide NWA ISSUE 2.1

Cover. MATWorX Installation Guide NWA ISSUE 2.1 Cover MATWorX Installation Guide NWA-008862-001 ISSUE 2.1 LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice. NEC

More information

RC-SV Configuration Guide (Rev 4)

RC-SV Configuration Guide (Rev 4) Kramer Electronics, Ltd. RC-SV Configuration Guide (Rev 4) Software Version 2.1.2.69 Intended for Kramer Technical Personnel or external System Integrators. To check that you have the latest version, go

More information

RC-SV Configuration Guide Revision 3

RC-SV Configuration Guide Revision 3 Kramer Electronics, Ltd. RC-SV Configuration Guide Revision 3 Software Version 2.1.2.32 Intended for Kramer Technical Personnel or external System Integrators. To check that you have the latest version,

More information

SOFTWARE INSTRUCTIONS DIGITAL SPEAKER PROCESSOR DP-SP3

SOFTWARE INSTRUCTIONS DIGITAL SPEAKER PROCESSOR DP-SP3 SOFTWARE INSTRUCTIONS DIGITAL SPEAKER PROCESSOR DP-SP3 Thank you for purchasing TOA s Digital Speaker Processor. Please carefully follow the instructions in this manual to ensure long, trouble-free use

More information

Serial ATA PCI RAID Quick Installation Guide

Serial ATA PCI RAID Quick Installation Guide Serial ATA PCI RAID Quick Installation Guide Introducing the Serial ATA PCI RAID The Serial ATA PCI RAID is an ultra high-speed two channel Serial ATA controller board for use in Pentium-class computers.

More information

Print Server. User s Manual. Rev. 01 (April, 2004) Made In Taiwan

Print Server. User s Manual. Rev. 01 (April, 2004) Made In Taiwan Print Server User s Manual Rev. 01 (April, 2004) Made In Taiwan TABLE OF CONTENTS ABOUT THIS GUIDE... 4 INTRODUCTION... 5 PACKAGE CONTENTS... 6 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS... 6 GENERAL FEATURES... 7 PRODUCT VIEW...

More information

Intel Server RAID Controller U2-1 Integration Guide For Microsoft* Windows NT* 4.0

Intel Server RAID Controller U2-1 Integration Guide For Microsoft* Windows NT* 4.0 Intel Server RAID Controller U2-1 Integration Guide For Microsoft* Windows NT* 4.0 Revision 1.0 February 2000 Revision History Revision Revision History Date 1.0 Initial Release 02/10/00 Intel Corporation

More information

SymSYNC TM User s Guide

SymSYNC TM User s Guide 1603-9821 SymSYNC TM User s Guide Cautions and Warnings Refer to the Simplex 125 User s Guide (Part No. 574-169) for all appropriate Cautions and Warnings. Introduction This publication shows how to install,

More information

Installation Instructions Model FMT

Installation Instructions Model FMT Installation Instructions Model FMT Fireman s Master Telephone ITRODUCTI The Model FMT Fireman s Master Telephone from Siemens Industry, Inc. provides firefighters with an emergency telephone system for

More information

FPA-1000-V2 Network Cards FPE-1000-NE, FPE-1000-NF, and FPE-1000-NW

FPA-1000-V2 Network Cards FPE-1000-NE, FPE-1000-NF, and FPE-1000-NW FPA-1000-V2 Network Cards FPE-1000-NE, FPE-1000-NF, and FPE-1000-NW en Installation manual FPA-1000-V2 Network Cards Table of contents en 3 Table of contents 1 General Information 4 1.1 Safety 4 1.2 Network

More information

291-MB333-04P7F EN1070K

291-MB333-04P7F EN1070K 291-MB333-04P7F EN1070K User s Manual ZOTAC ZBOX No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,

More information

PL-590*T Replacement Guidebook

PL-590*T Replacement Guidebook Easy! Smooth! Replacement Guidebook 1/28 Preface Thank you very much for using Pro-face panel computers. Thanks to your continued support, the 10.4-inch PL-5910 series introduced in January 2005 and its

More information

USB 2.0 Print Server. User s Manual. Rev. 01 (Jan, 2004) Made In Taiwan

USB 2.0 Print Server. User s Manual. Rev. 01 (Jan, 2004) Made In Taiwan USB 2.0 Print Server User s Manual Rev. 01 (Jan, 2004) Made In Taiwan TABLE OF CONTENTS ABOUT THIS GUIDE... 4 INTRODUCTION... 5 PACKAGE CONTENTS... 6 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS... 6 GENERAL FEATURES... 7 PRODUCT

More information

Installing the Dionex PeakNet -PA System For PeakNet-PA Version 5.21

Installing the Dionex PeakNet -PA System For PeakNet-PA Version 5.21 Installing the Dionex PeakNet -PA System For PeakNet-PA Version 5.21 2002 Dionex Corporation Document No. 031832 Revision 01 June 2002 2002 by Dionex Corporation All rights reserved worldwide. Printed

More information

NFS NFS-3030 NFS2-640 NFS-640 NFS-320 NCA NCA-2 DVC-EM ONYXWorks

NFS NFS-3030 NFS2-640 NFS-640 NFS-320 NCA NCA-2 DVC-EM ONYXWorks 12 Clintonville Road Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA 203-484-7161 FAX 203-484-7118 www.notifier.com High-Speed Network Communications Module Product Installation Document 1 Product Overview PN 54014:B 11/17/2009

More information

CAB-BATT, CAB-BATT-R, CAB2-BB, CAB2-BD, CAB3-BB, CAB3-BD, CAB-MP, ID-MP, ID-SP, ID-FP, BCM, OD-LP, OD-BP, OD-GP, REMBOX2, REMBOX4, XLS-MLE6-ADPT,

CAB-BATT, CAB-BATT-R, CAB2-BB, CAB2-BD, CAB3-BB, CAB3-BD, CAB-MP, ID-MP, ID-SP, ID-FP, BCM, OD-LP, OD-BP, OD-GP, REMBOX2, REMBOX4, XLS-MLE6-ADPT, Data Sheet Fire Safety & Security Products s FireFinder TM XLS Fire Alarm Enclosures & Equipment Models: CAB1, CAB-BATT, CAB-BATT-R, CAB2-BB, CAB2-BD, CAB3-BB, CAB3-BD, CAB-MP, ID-MP, ID-SP, ID-FP, BCM,

More information

Network Client Remote Management Software. Bid-Spec

Network Client Remote Management Software. Bid-Spec Bid-Spec 1.0 Description The v5.0 software accessory shall be a tool for retrieving and viewing live or recorded video images from one or more Intellex Digital Video Management Systems (DVMS). These images

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Table of Contents Installation Overview General Installation Overview... Setting Up Your Machine Network Configuration... 4 Setting up the Network Configuration... 4 Installation Installing the Printer

More information

Serial ATA PCI RAID Quick Installation Guide

Serial ATA PCI RAID Quick Installation Guide Serial ATA PCI RAID Quick Installation Guide Introducing the Serial ATA PCI RAID The Serial ATA PCI RAID is an ultra high-speed two channel Serial ATA controller board for use in Pentium-class computers.

More information

PL-79** Series Replacement Guidebook

PL-79** Series Replacement Guidebook Easy! Smooth! PL-79** Series Replacement Guidebook 1/35 Preface This guidebook introduces the procedures to replace your unit in the PL-79** series with the PL3000 or PS3000 series. The recommended replacement

More information

Pre-Installation Information--S8700 IP Connect

Pre-Installation Information--S8700 IP Connect Pre-Installation Information--S8700 IP Connect Avaya S8700 Media Server for IP Connect Configuration This job aid provides information, hardware, and tools required for installing an Avaya S8700 Media

More information

APPENDIX FOR AccuLINK (CSG-M) Revision 17.01

APPENDIX FOR AccuLINK (CSG-M) Revision 17.01 Fire Safety APPENDIX FOR AccuLINK (CSG-M) Revision 17.01 Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 8 Fernwood Road Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 Siemens Building Technologies, Ltd. 2 Kenview Boulevard Brampton,

More information

Define each of the following computer terms. 1 Period 7 Lesson Computer Terms 1 Wallpaper 2 URL 3 Mainframe 4 Function Keys 5 Font 6 Paste 7 Paint

Define each of the following computer terms. 1 Period 7 Lesson Computer Terms 1 Wallpaper 2 URL 3 Mainframe 4 Function Keys 5 Font 6 Paste 7 Paint 1 Period 7 1 Wallpaper 2 URL 3 Mainframe 4 Function Keys 5 Font 6 Paste 7 Paint 8.pcx 9 External hard drive 10 Programmer 11 Power Supply 12 LAN 13 Operating system 14 CAD 15 Crash 16 Power Supply 17 Enable

More information

DP SATA 6Gb/s PCIe i/e Quick Installation Guide

DP SATA 6Gb/s PCIe i/e Quick Installation Guide DP SATA 6Gb/s PCIe i/e Quick Installation Guide Introducing the SATA 6Gb/s PCIe i/e The DP SATA 6Gb/s PCIe i/e adds 2 SATA 6Gb/s & a PATA connectors to PCIe-equipped computers. Features and Benefits Dual

More information

SYLLABUS OF ADVANCED CARD LEVEL & CHIP LEVEL TRAINING ( DESKTOP AND LAPTOP )

SYLLABUS OF ADVANCED CARD LEVEL & CHIP LEVEL TRAINING ( DESKTOP AND LAPTOP ) SYLLABUS OF ADVANCED CARD LEVEL & CHIP LEVEL TRAINING ( DESKTOP AND LAPTOP ) Module 1 - Basic Electronics Basic Electronics Concept A/C, D/C Concepts & Flow Of Current Resistors - Meaning & Use Of Resistors,

More information

LIVE PLAYER. VR-5033 (Applicable to VR-5000 software version )

LIVE PLAYER. VR-5033 (Applicable to VR-5000 software version ) LIVE PLAYER VR-5033 (Applicable to VR-5000 software version 2.07.00) TABLE OF CONTENTS FOREWORD... ii 1. INSTALLATION... 1 1.1 Requirements... 1 1.2 Software Installation... 1 2. PLAYER CONFIGURATION...

More information

Computer Specifications. EPSON ActionNote 700 Series. Controllers. CPU and Memory. Interfaces. EPSON ActionNote 700 Series-l 4/94

Computer Specifications. EPSON ActionNote 700 Series. Controllers. CPU and Memory. Interfaces. EPSON ActionNote 700 Series-l 4/94 trackball hard disk drive Computer Specifications CPU and Memory CPU System speed Memory ROM Cyrix 32-bit, 3.3 volt Cx486DX-V33 microprocessor; includes built-in math coprocessor, 8KB of internal cache,

More information

WVL2 Wireless Vehicle Link 2 Installation and Setup Manual

WVL2 Wireless Vehicle Link 2 Installation and Setup Manual WVL2 Wireless Vehicle Link 2 Installation and Setup Manual Chapter 1: Introducing the Wireless Vehicle Link 2...1 WVL2 Components...2 Component Checklist...3 Product Specifications...4 System Requirements...5

More information

OPERATION MANUAL. MV-410HS Layout Editor. Version higher. Command

OPERATION MANUAL. MV-410HS Layout Editor. Version higher. Command OPERATION MANUAL MV-410HS Layout Editor Version 3.0 - higher Command Command Table of Contents 1. Setup... 1 1-1. Overview... 1 1-2. System Requirements... 1 1-3. Operation Flow... 1 1-4. Installing MV-410HS

More information

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Model VCC2002-A1 Voice input/output Card

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Model VCC2002-A1 Voice input/output Card INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Model VCC2002-A Voice input/output Card The Model VCC2002-A Voice I/O card is installed into the FV2025/2050 Fire Voice Control Panel of the FS20 system. Together with the VCC200-A

More information

HP Data Protector Media Operations 6.11

HP Data Protector Media Operations 6.11 HP Data Protector Media Operations 6.11 Getting started This guide describes installing, starting and configuring Media Operations. Copyright 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Part number:

More information

Plus-X IIU / ICRU Installation Guide

Plus-X IIU / ICRU Installation Guide Installing the Plus-X IIU & ICRU Plus-X IIU / ICRU Installation Guide The Plus-X Integrated Input Unit (Plus-X IIU) and Plus-X Integrated Command Relay (Plus-X ICRU) are used to connect site equipment

More information

Hardware Installation Guide Installation (x3350)

Hardware Installation Guide Installation (x3350) Title page Nortel Application Gateway 2000 Nortel Application Gateway Release 6.3 Hardware Installation Guide Installation (x3350) Document Number: NN42400-300 Document Release: Standard 04.03 Date: January

More information

Fast Ethernet Print Server 1 Parallel, 2 USB

Fast Ethernet Print Server 1 Parallel, 2 USB Fast Ethernet Print Server 1 Parallel, 2 USB User s Manual Rev. 01 (Nov, 2005) Made In Taiwan TABLE OF CONTENTS ABOUT THIS GUIDE... 4 INTRODUCTION... 5 PACKAGE CONTENTS... 6 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS... 6 GENERAL

More information

DBT-120 Bluetooth USB Adapter

DBT-120 Bluetooth USB Adapter DBT-120 Bluetooth USB Adapter Rev.2.1 (09/25/2002) 2 Contents Introduction... 5 Package Contents... 6 Installing Bluetooth Software... 6 Hardware Installation... 8 Introduction to Bluetooth Software...

More information

PL-69** Series Replacement Guidebook

PL-69** Series Replacement Guidebook Easy! Smooth! PL-69** Series Replacement Guidebook 1/27 Preface This guidebook introduces the procedures to replace your unit in the PL-69** series with the PL3000 or PS3000 series. The recommended replacement

More information

ZOTAC ZBOX User s Manual

ZOTAC ZBOX User s Manual ZOTAC ZBOX User s Manual No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language

More information

Colorful Technology Website:

Colorful Technology Website: Colorful Technology Website: http://www.colorful.cn Thanks for purchasing our based on Intel B250 Chipset motherboard. The motherboard C.B250A-BTC PLUS V20 based on Intel B250 Express Chipset, support

More information

Avigilon Control Center Server User Guide

Avigilon Control Center Server User Guide Avigilon Control Center Server User Guide Version 5.0 PDF-SERVER5-A-Rev1 Copyright 2013 Avigilon. All rights reserved. The information presented is subject to change without notice. No copying, distribution,

More information

Quick start guide for p5 520 ( )

Quick start guide for p5 520 ( ) Quick start guide for p5 520 (9111-520) 1 Before you begin This Quick start guide contains an abbreviated set of setup instructions designed to help you quickly unpack and set up a standard system. Users

More information

ZOTAC ZBOX User s Manual

ZOTAC ZBOX User s Manual ZOTAC ZBOX User s Manual No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language

More information

Safe Place and Code Alert Customer Information Technology Requirements Series 10.x Software

Safe Place and Code Alert Customer Information Technology Requirements Series 10.x Software Safe Place and Code Alert Customer Information Technology Requirements Series 10.x Software 2017 RF Technologies, Inc. All specifications subject to change without notice. All Rights Reserved. No Part

More information

FA-2448 SIX POSITION Filter Wheel

FA-2448 SIX POSITION Filter Wheel 15 Discovery Way, Acton, MA 01720 Phone: (978)263-3584, Fax: (978)263-5086 Web Site: www.acton-research.com Operating Instructions Acton Research Corporation FA-2448 SIX POSITION Filter Wheel Rev. 3.05.17

More information

ZOTAC ZBOX. User s Manual

ZOTAC ZBOX. User s Manual User s Manual ZOTAC ZBOX No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language

More information

Installing and Using VeritiLink Software Quick Reference Card

Installing and Using VeritiLink Software Quick Reference Card VeritiLink Remote Management Software Installing and Using VeritiLink Software Quick Reference Card For more information on installing VeritiLink Software, see the VeritiLink Remote Management Software

More information

Quick start guide for i5 520 ( or )

Quick start guide for i5 520 ( or ) Quick start guide for i5 520 (9405-520 or 9406-520) 1 Before you begin This Quick start guide contains an abbreviated set of setup instructions designed to help you quickly unpack and set up a standard

More information

Access Control System

Access Control System Access Control System Version 3.0 Hardware and Software Installation Guide Long Range RFID (UHF) Readers and Tags Specialist Smart Key Access Control System Installation Guide i Smart Key Contact Information

More information

The list below shows items not included with a SmartVDI-110 Server. Monitors Ethernet cables (copper) Fiber optic cables Keyboard and mouse

The list below shows items not included with a SmartVDI-110 Server. Monitors Ethernet cables (copper) Fiber optic cables Keyboard and mouse SmartVDI-110 Server Quick Start Guide Container Contents Included in container The list below shows components included in a SmartVDI-110 container. SmartVDI-110 Server Chassis mounting rails and hardware

More information

RKAT Audit Trail Module RK-LINK TM Software For the Radio Key 600 Series

RKAT Audit Trail Module RK-LINK TM Software For the Radio Key 600 Series RKAT Audit Trail Module RK-LINK TM Software For the Radio Key 600 Series INSTALLATION & OPERATING GUIDE Rev. B P/N 3321515 www.securakeystore.com (800) 878-7829 sales@securakeystore.com COPYRIGHT 2001

More information

NETAFIM WILL NOT ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF NETAFIM'S PRODUCTS OR THE USE OF THIS MANUAL.

NETAFIM WILL NOT ACCEPT RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE RESULTING FROM THE USE OF NETAFIM'S PRODUCTS OR THE USE OF THIS MANUAL. [Type text] COPYRIGHT 2011, NETAFIM NO PARTS OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE REPRODUCED, STORED IN AN AUTOMATED DATA FILE OR MADE PUBLIC IN ANY FORM OR BY ANY MEANS, WHETHER ELECTRONIC, MECHANICAL, BY PHOTOCOPYING,

More information

LAN-505 Ethernet Communication

LAN-505 Ethernet Communication Ethernet Communication 1.0 Purpose of this Document This document discusses how to setup, configure, and use the Universal Device Server to provide LAN/WAN Ethernet connectivity between Doors and one or

More information

OPERATION MANUAL. MV-410HS Web Browser. Version Rev.2

OPERATION MANUAL. MV-410HS Web Browser. Version Rev.2 OPERATION MANUAL MV-410HS Web Browser Version 1.0 - Rev.2 Table of Contents 1. Setup... 1 1-1. Overview... 1 1-2. System Requirements... 1 1-3. Installing Java(TM)... 2 1-4. Connections... 3 1-5. Communication

More information

and Network Interface Modules Installation Instructions

and Network Interface Modules Installation Instructions 4010-9817 and 4010-9821 Network Interface Modules Installation Instructions Cautions and Warnings DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the

More information

Cascade Configuration Tool

Cascade Configuration Tool Cascade Configuration Tool Version 1.0.10 Installation and Operations Manual 00-02-0724 01-25-11 Section 40 In order to consistently bring you the highest quality, full featured products, we reserve the

More information

ZOTAC ZBOX User s Manual

ZOTAC ZBOX User s Manual User s Manual No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in

More information

Laser Printer P2500. Quick Setup Guide. Read this Setup Guide before you set up the printer.

Laser Printer P2500. Quick Setup Guide. Read this Setup Guide before you set up the printer. Laser Printer P2500 Quick Setup Guide Read this Setup Guide before you set up the printer. Before you can use the printer, you must set up the hardware and install the printer and scanner drivers. Identify

More information

EVGA assumes you have purchased all necessary parts needed to allow for proper system functionality.

EVGA assumes you have purchased all necessary parts needed to allow for proper system functionality. Before You Begin Parts NOT in the Kit This kit contains all the hardware necessary to install and connect your new EVGA e-7050/610i GPU motherboard with integrated GeForce graphics processing. However,

More information

ZOTAC ZBOX nano. User s Manual

ZOTAC ZBOX nano. User s Manual User s Manual ZOTAC ZBOX nano No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into

More information

M1032W Engineering Workstation. The list below shows components included in an M1032W Engineering Workstation container.

M1032W Engineering Workstation. The list below shows components included in an M1032W Engineering Workstation container. M1032W Engineering Workstation Container Contents Included in container The list below shows components included in an M1032W Engineering Workstation container. M1032W Engineering Workstation Chassis mounting

More information

USER MANUAL. RC-74DL Master Room Controller MODEL: P/N: Rev 4

USER MANUAL. RC-74DL Master Room Controller MODEL: P/N: Rev 4 KRAMER ELECTRONICS LTD. USER MANUAL MODEL: RC-74DL Master Room Controller P/N: 2900-000691 Rev 4 Contents 1 Introduction 1 2 Getting Started 2 2.1 Achieving the Best Performance 2 2.2 Safety Instructions

More information

Mac OS 8 Installation Instructions for Sonnet Presto and Presto Plus Processor Upgrade Cards

Mac OS 8 Installation Instructions for Sonnet Presto and Presto Plus Processor Upgrade Cards Mac OS 8 Installation Instructions for Sonnet Presto and Presto Plus Processor Upgrade Cards What You Need: Sonnet Presto or Presto Plus processor upgrade card. Sonnet Presto 8 Enabler Boot diskette. Macintosh

More information

Cyber 1S1P PCI Quick Installation Guide

Cyber 1S1P PCI Quick Installation Guide Introducing the Cyber 1S1P PCI The Cyber 1S1P PCI high-speed serial I/O card provides one 9-pin serial port and one parallel port. Features and Benefits Conforms to PCI v2.2 Plug and Play Full support

More information

Avigilon Control Center Server User Guide

Avigilon Control Center Server User Guide Avigilon Control Center Server User Guide Version 4.12 PDF-SERVER-E-Rev1 Copyright 2012 Avigilon. All rights reserved. The information presented is subject to change without notice. No copying, distribution,

More information

Installation Guide. Getting Started with MaxAttach NAS 6000 Rack Mount Base Unit Systems

Installation Guide. Getting Started with MaxAttach NAS 6000 Rack Mount Base Unit Systems Installation Guide Getting Started with MaxAttach NAS 6000 Rack Mount Base Unit Systems MaxAttach NAS 6000 Getting Started Document Revision Information Document Title: Getting Started with MaxAttach NAS

More information

PL-69** Series Replacement Guidebook

PL-69** Series Replacement Guidebook Easy! Smooth! PL-69** Series Replacement Guidebook 1/27 Preface This guidebook introduces the procedures to replace your unit in the PL-69** series with the PL3000 or PS3000 series. The recommended replacement

More information

Lesson 1: Preparing for Installation

Lesson 1: Preparing for Installation 2-2 Chapter 2 Installing Windows XP Professional Lesson 1: Preparing for Installation When you install Windows XP Professional, the Windows XP Professional Setup program allows you to specify how to install

More information

USER MANUAL. RC-76R/RC-78R Room Controllers MODEL: P/N: Rev 2

USER MANUAL. RC-76R/RC-78R Room Controllers MODEL: P/N: Rev 2 KRAMER ELECTRONICS LTD. USER MANUAL MODEL: RC-76R/RC-78R Room Controllers P/N: 2900-300253 Rev 2 Contents 1 Introduction 1 2 Getting Started 2 2.1 Achieving the Best Performance 2 2.2 Safety Instructions

More information

Upgrading and Servicing Guide

Upgrading and Servicing Guide Upgrading and Servicing Guide The only warranties for Hewlett-Packard products and services are set forth in the express statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Operating Instructions (For User Setup) Digital Colour Imaging Systems Model No. DP-C406 / C306 / C266 Table of Contents Installation Overview General Installation Overview...2 Installation Installing

More information

SWC1090 configuration software for G.M. International Isolators series D1000 and E1000. Installation and use manual

SWC1090 configuration software for G.M. International Isolators series D1000 and E1000. Installation and use manual SWC1090 configuration software for G.M. International Isolators series D1000 and E1000 Installation and use manual ISM0084-2 Installation and use of the SWC1090 calibration software Page 1 of 12 Index

More information

GigaStor Upgradeable 2U. User Guide

GigaStor Upgradeable 2U. User Guide GigaStor Upgradeable 2U User Guide Table of Contents Chapter 1: Installation...1 Unpacking and inspecting the parts...1 Installing the drives in your GigaStor...1 How to handle hard drives properly...

More information

ZOTAC ZBOX nano. User s Manual

ZOTAC ZBOX nano. User s Manual User s Manual ZOTAC ZBOX nano No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into

More information

LOREX CLIENT 3.0 SOFTWARE MANUAL IRMS Integrated Remote Management Software

LOREX CLIENT 3.0 SOFTWARE MANUAL IRMS Integrated Remote Management Software LOREX CLIENT 3.0 SOFTWARE MANUAL IRMS Integrated Remote Management Software Instruction Manual English Version 2.0 Copyright 2007 Lorex Technology Inc. www.lorexcctv.com Table of Contents Overview... -

More information

IntesisBox Modbus Server KILSEN KSA-7xx. User s Manual 08/2013 r1.2 eng

IntesisBox Modbus Server KILSEN KSA-7xx. User s Manual 08/2013 r1.2 eng IntesisBox Modbus Server KILSEN KSA-7xx User s Manual 08/2013 r1.2 eng Intesis Software S.L. 2013 All rights reserved. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. The software described

More information

Getting Started. Overview of the Splash G3535

Getting Started. Overview of the Splash G3535 Getting Started This Getting Started explains how to unpack, install, and connect the Splash G3535 Color Server. After completing the tasks outlined in this guide, you can explore the features of the Splash

More information

Software Operations Manual

Software Operations Manual Software Operations Manual Version 5.0 System Requirements PC with 1GHz or higher, Intel Pentium Processor or compatible Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Vista Business Edition Microsoft.NET framework

More information

Junos WebApp Secure 5.0 Hardware Guide

Junos WebApp Secure 5.0 Hardware Guide Junos WebApp Secure 5.0 Hardware Guide Junos WebApp Secure 5.0 Hardware Guide This document contains a specification for the MWS1000 hardware appliance, as well as instructions for installation into a

More information

EQ7000. User Manual. Rev 1.00

EQ7000. User Manual. Rev 1.00 EQ7000 User Manual Rev 1.00 www.equustek.com Revision 1.00 February 27, 2009 Contents INTRODUCTION...4 ABOUT THIS MANUAL...4 INTENDED AUDIENCE...4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS...5 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS...5

More information

PageScope Net Care Device Manager Ver. 2.0 User s Guide

PageScope Net Care Device Manager Ver. 2.0 User s Guide PageScope Net Care Device Manager Ver..0 User s Guide Net Care Device Manager Contents 1 Summary 1.1 Introduction...1-1 1.1.1 About Device Manager...1-1 Basic and extended functions... 1-1 Configuration

More information

VAPOR PRO COMMUNICATIONS

VAPOR PRO COMMUNICATIONS ARIZONA INSTRUMENT LLC VAPOR PRO COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION MANUAL Version 1.0.3 September 2010 Arizona Instrument LLC 3375 N Delaware Street Chandler, AZ 85225 (800) 528-7411 (602) 470-1414 Fax (480) 804-0656

More information

ZOTAC VR GO. User s Manual

ZOTAC VR GO. User s Manual User s Manual ZOTAC VR GO No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any

More information

Meridian 1 Attendant Hospitality Services Software Installation Guide

Meridian 1 Attendant Hospitality Services Software Installation Guide Meridian 1 Attendant Hospitality Services Software Installation Guide Document Number: P0889885 Document Release: Standard 2.00 Date: June 1999 Year Publish FCC TM 1997, 1999 All rights reserved Printed

More information

Data Acquisition Software and Hardware Demonstration Guide

Data Acquisition Software and Hardware Demonstration Guide Data Acquisition Software and Hardware Demonstration Guide For: NetDAQ Logger for Windows Hydra Logger for Windows Trend Link for Fluke Introduction This demonstration guide contains exercises designed

More information

LifeSize ClearSea Installation Guide August 2012

LifeSize ClearSea Installation Guide August 2012 LifeSize ClearSea Installation Guide August 2012 LifeSize ClearSea LifeSize ClearSea Virtual Machine LifeSize ClearSea Installation Guide 2 LifeSize ClearSea This guide describes how to install and configure

More information

Manager Appliance Quick Start Guide

Manager Appliance Quick Start Guide Revision D Manager Appliance Quick Start Guide The Manager Appliance runs on a pre-installed, hardened McAfee Linux Operating System (MLOS) and comes pre-loaded with the Network Security Manager software.

More information

1.0 Connecting OpenGN to FleX-Net TM

1.0 Connecting OpenGN to FleX-Net TM 1.0! Attention: Before you begin, follow the instructions in LT-1113 OpenGN Administrator s Guide to install OpenGN and configure the computer running OpenGN and the OpenGN Gateway. i Note: These instructions

More information

IBM Systems. Quick start guide for IBM System p5 505 ( )

IBM Systems. Quick start guide for IBM System p5 505 ( ) IBM Systems Quick start guide for IBM System p5 505 (9115-505) 1 Before you begin This Quick start guide contains an abbreviated set of setup instructions designed to help you quickly unpack and set up

More information